Quarterlytics / Technology / Solid State PLC

Solid State PLC

soli · LSE Technology
Claim this profile
Ticker soli
Exchange LSE
Sector Technology
Industry
Employees 201-500
← All annual reports
FY2021 Annual Report · Solid State PLC
Sign in to download
Loading PDF…
0 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
CONTENTS 

2.    Directors, Secretary and Advisers  

3.    Chairman’s Statement 

6.    Strategic Report 

20.  Corporate and Social Responsibility Report 

24.  Corporate Governance Report 

39.  Audit Committee Report 

44.  Remuneration Committee Report 

58.  Directors’ Report  

62.  Report of the Independent Auditors 

69.  Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income  

70.  Consolidated Statement of Changes in Equity 

72.  Consolidated Statement of Financial Position 

73.  Consolidated Statement of Cash Flows  

75.  Notes to the Financial Statements  

121.  Company Statement of Financial Position 

122.  Company Statement of Changes in Equity 

123.  Notes to the Company Financial Statements 

127.  Notice of Annual General Meeting  

1 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Directors:  

DIRECTORS, SECRETARY AND ADVISERS 

Nigel Rogers, Non-Executive Chairman 
Gary Marsh, Chief Executive Officer 
Peter James, BSc FCA, Chief Financial Officer 
John Macmichael, Executive Director 
Matthew Richards, Executive Director 
Peter Magowan, Non-Executive Director (Appointed 1 Jan 2021) 
Peter Haining, FCA, Non-Executive Director 

Company Secretary and  
Registered Office:  

Peter Haining, FCA  
Solid State PLC  
2 Ravensbank Business Park 
Hedera Road, Redditch 
B98 9EY 

Company Number:  

00771335  

Nominated Adviser and   
Broker: 

Joint Broker:  

Auditors:  

Solicitors:  

Bankers:  

Registrars:  

Country of Incorporation 
of Parent Company:  

Legal Form: 

Domicile: 

W H Ireland Limited 
24 Martin Lane 
London EC4R 0DR 

finnCap Limited 
One Bartholomew Close 
London EC1A 7BL 

RSM UK Audit LLP 
St Philips Point, Temple Row 
Birmingham  
West Midlands 
B2 5AF 

Shakespeare Martineau LLP 
1 Colmore Square 
Birmingham 
West Midlands 
B4 6AA 

Lloyds Bank PLC 
125 Colmore Row 
Birmingham 
West Midlands 
B3 3SF 

Neville Registrars Limited 
Neville House 
Steelpark Road 
Halesowen 
B62 8HD 

England and Wales 

Public Limited Company 

United Kingdom 

2 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
CHAIRMAN’S STATEMENT 

Introduction 
I  am  pleased  to  report  that  the  Group  has  delivered  another  year  of  record  profits  despite  a  challenging  market 
environment.  Group management continues to make good progress in the implementation of its strategy by investing in 
people and technology, and through the completion of two bolt-on acquisitions late in the year which significantly enhance 
the Group’s capabilities. 

Our business model has displayed resilience in the face of the global COVID-19 pandemic, demonstrating the benefits of 
our  diverse  geographical,  industry  sector  coverage  and  our  decentralised  footprint.    Whilst  the  acute  impact  of  the 
pandemic is now receding, there are longer term effects on component availability, logistical disruption and inflationary 
pressures which are expected to endure into 2022.  These are complex and can be difficult to navigate and call upon the 
full range of skills and experience of our well established team.   

The Group also entered the current financial year with a strong balance sheet, and the addition of Willow Technologies 
Group (Willow) and Active Silicon Group (Active), providing further momentum to maintain our growth record. 

Financial overview 
Set out below are the financial key performance indicators which reflect the record year and a very pleasing result: 

KPI 
Reported Revenue 
Reported operating profit margin 
Adjusted operating profit margin* 
Reported profit before taxation 
Adjusted profit before taxation* 
Reported EPS 
Adjusted diluted EPS  
Underlying cash flow from operations 
Net cash/(net debt)** 
Dividend 
Open order book @ 31 May  

2021 
£66.3m 
6.5% 
8.3% 
£4.2m 
£5.4m 
46.4p 
54.7p 
£6.9m 
(£4.4m) 
16.0p 
£51.0m 

2020 
£67.4m 
6.1% 
7.2% 
£4.0m 
£4.7m 
40.1p 
46.3p 
£8.0m 
£3.2m 
12.5p 
£37.9m 

Change 
-1.6% 
+40bps 
+110bps 
+5.0% 
+14.9% 
+15.7% 
+18.1% 
-13.8% 
-237.5% 
+28.0% 
+34.6% 

* Adjusted performance metrics are reconciled in note 32, the adjustments relate to IFRS 3 acquisition amortisation, Share based payments charges, and non-recurring 
charges in respect of redundancies and acquisition costs and fair value adjustments. 
** Net cash / debt includes net cash with banks £3.1m (2020: £3.2m), the fair value of deferred contingent consideration of £7.5m (2020: nil) and excludes the right of use 
lease liabilities of £2.5m (2020: £1.1m).  

The Group has delivered: 

• 

Stable revenue year on year at £66.3m (2020: £67.4m), reflecting diversified market sector exposure which has 
given the business resilience to the COVID-19 pandemic and Brexit challenges. 

•  Record profitability reflected in adjusted operating margins increasing 110bps to 8.3%, based on solid margins in 

both divisions and the improved operational efficiencies. 
•  Adjusted fully diluted EPS up 18% to 54.7p (2020: 46.3p). 
• 

Consistently  strong  operating  cash  generation  of  £6.9m  (2020:  £8.0m)  with  reported  cash  conversion  of  162% 
(2020: 195%). 

•  A dividend increased 28% on prior year reflecting record performance in the year. 
•  An  open  order  book  on  31  May  2021  of  £51.0m  -  and  £41.4m  (2020:  £37.9m)  on  like-for-like  (excludes  the 
companies acquired during the year) basis reflecting 9.2% organic growth in the open order book on 31 May 2021. 

Strategic Achievements in 2020/21  

Notable achievements in 2020/21 to advance our strategy included: 
•  Acquisitions of Willow Technologies and Active Silicon: 

o  Enhanced technology adding a portfolio of own brand image processing products and electro-mechanical 

components (including component manufacturing capabilities in USA); and, 
o  Enhanced the international sales capabilities and resources in the USA and Europe. 

• 

• 

Internal technology development of the Group’s battery pack and Battery Management Systems (BMS) offering, 
own brand computing products and building the portfolio of communications products through the Group R&D 
programme. 
Established  in-house  Electromagnetic  Compatibility  (EMC)  testing  capabilities  through  the  capital  investment 
programme. 

3 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
CHAIRMAN’S STATEMENT (continued) 

Strategy 

The  Group  provides  customers  broad-based  access  to  trusted  electronic  technology  for  demanding  applications  and 
extreme environments and has a commercial focus on high growth markets including security & defence, medical, green 
energy, transport, communications and industrial.   

Our medium-term financial objective to double fully diluted adjusted earnings from 30 pence to 60 pence per share over a 
five year period to March 2022 is on track. The accelerated growth rate achieved in recent periods reflects the benefit of 
the  foundations  which  have  been  laid  and  the  significant  opportunities  for  continued  growth.  The  Directors  are  fully 
committed  to  continuous  development  of  our  capabilities  to  build  on  this  success,  further  strengthen  our  partnership 
approach with major customers, and continue to share rewards equitably amongst all of our stakeholders. 

Although  there  are  acknowledged  short  term  supply  challenges  for  our  industry,  the  demand  outlook  for  customised 
electronic solutions offers exciting opportunities.  Many ground breaking technologies are embedded within our current 
activities,  and  there  is  scope  for  further  investment  in  specialist  skills  and  knowledge  to  expand  and  differentiate  our 
offering to customers, both through internal development and acquisition as we target international expansion. 

We are building ever closer relationships with our customers, adding substantial value through early stage integration into 
their  design  and  development  road  maps,  and  interlocking  with  their  operational  and  logistics  processes.    This  will  be 
achieved by further strengthening channels of co-operation between Group entities, building cross-selling specialist teams 
to facilitate ease of customer access to our full range of products and services. 

Governance and Accountability 

The structure of the Board has continued to evolve with the appointment of Pete Magowan as Senior Independent Director 
in November 2020, at the same time as my own transition to become independent Non-Executive Chairman.  The Non-
Executive element of the Board is completed by Peter Haining, who also acted as Interim Chairman during the year prior to 
my appointment. 

Following my appointment, a formal board effectiveness review was undertaken which identified some updating to board 
processes  and  documentation  which  have  all  now  been  actioned.    There  is  further  work  underway  to  address  the 
Environmental, Social and Governance (ESG) agenda which will form an increasingly important element of future reports 
as additional metrics are identified and progressed. 

In  communication  with  our  shareholders  and  others,  our  primary  aim  is  to  provide  timely,  well  balanced  and  succinct 
information about our business and its prospects to a wide audience on a regular basis.  In addition to our Annual General 
Meeting and scheduled meetings with key institutional shareholders, we participate in periodic on-line presentations which 
are open to all by prior arrangement on the “Investor Meet Company” platform (www.investormeetcompany.com).  

People 

The wider impact of the COVID-19 pandemic has placed an extraordinary burden on all of our people in different ways.  
Group management has taken great care in leading initiatives to keep our workplaces and all of our staff safe and healthy, 
with focus on broader social welfare in addition to physical protection.  With the worst effects now apparently receding 
and an element of normality returning, I take this opportunity to record the sincere thanks of the Board to everyone who 
has worked so diligently to ensure the continuity of our service to customers, and the welfare of all our people and their 
families.   

Acquisitions 

In  early  March  2021  we  announced  the  acquisitions  of  Active  Silicon  Limited  and  Willow  Technologies  Limited,  two 
companies  which  enhance  our  technology  offering  to  customers  as  well  as  providing  increased  international  coverage.  
These represent the eleventh and twelfth such transactions completed since 2002.  We are delighted to welcome these 
companies and their staff into the Group fold and are very encouraged by the early successes they have achieved under 
Group ownership.   

We continue to evaluate opportunities to expand our range of specialist applications and international reach through the 
acquisition of high-quality businesses as a key element of our strategy for future growth. 

4 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
CHAIRMAN’S STATEMENT (continued) 

Dividend 

The Group has paid dividends in each of the twenty five years since joining AIM in 1996. The dividend policy is progressive, 
and payments are proposed by reference to dividend cover in the range 2.5 to 3.0 times over a medium-term cycle.  In the 
prior  year,  the  Board  took  account  of  the  exceptional  circumstances  arising  from  the  pandemic,  and  total  dividend 
payments were maintained at 12.5 pence per share covered 3.2 times by earnings. 

Whilst the inherent uncertainty surrounding the effects of the pandemic has abated since last year, the Directors continue 
to take a relatively prudent short term view and consider that some restraint in the dividend increase so as to remain at 
the  upper  end  of  the  long  term  cover  target  continues  to  be  appropriate.    Accordingly,  the  Board  is  proposing  a  final 
dividend of 10.75 pence (2020: 7.25 pence) resulting in full year dividends of 16.0 pence (12.5 pence) which is covered 2.9 
times by earnings (2020: 3.2 times). 

Subject to approval of the final dividend by shareholders at the AGM on 8 September 2021, the final dividend will be paid 
on 24 September 2021 to shareholders on the register at the close of business on 3 September 2021, and the shares will 
be marked ex-dividend on 2 September 2021. 

Opportunities and prospects for 2021/2022 

Whilst the forthcoming period will no doubt be adversely affected by the effects of component shortages and the recovery 
from COVID-19, the Group is well placed to take advantage of the current challenges and emerge in a stronger position 
than many of its competitors.  Although the Group is seeing record order intake in Q1 2021/22, its diverse sector exposure 
and strong open order book will provide some resilience. 

The  Group’s  business  model  now  serves  a  wide  customer  base  of  over  2000  clients,  operating  across  multiple  sectors, 
offering a broad product range with decentralised production. This diversification provides the Group with resilience when 
markets are challenging.  

The Board believes two of the key technology areas where it expects to see significant growth in demand in the medium 
term are image capture, processing, and transmission, driven by increased adoption of industrial AI and the roll out of 5G, 
and power control and switching driven by the drive to reduce carbon emissions and EV. The Group’s recent acquisition of 
Willow  Technologies  and  Active  Silicon  are  critical  to  ensuring  that  the  Group  is  positioned  to  further  penetrate  these 
sectors and gain market share in addition to providing products which it can sell internationally. 

Positively, the Group has seen initial signs of recovery from sectors which were significantly adversely impacted by COVID-
19 such as oil & gas and commercial aviation, albeit not to historic levels. The Group continues to benefit from opportunities 
in  these  core  areas,  whilst  also  developing  its  presence  in  new  and  emerging  growth  markets.  The  Group  has  a strong 
position in the security and defence sector which is seeing significant investment in technology which the Group is well 
placed to deliver. Furthermore any shift by prime contractors away from a globalised supply chain to buying more of their 
vital electronics and services closer to home will be positive for the Group.  

Solid State continues to focus on cross Group collaboration initiatives to drive organic sales. The capabilities added through 
the acquisitions further add scale and capability which the Group can provide to the enlarged customer base. We have been 
selected as a supplier on two programmes which are expected to start in FY21/22, leveraging the full capabilities of the 
Group, bringing new and previously unattainable opportunities to the business. 

The  focus  for  future  growth  remains  on  high  reliability,  harsh  environment  applications  where  we  can  add  value.  New 
applications for our technology in robotics solutions and emerging green transport programmes are being targeted in varied 
market sectors across commercial, industrial and high reliability applications. The Group is taking care to select markets for 
its products and solutions that have not been commoditised. 

Although the timing of supplies and programmes remains difficult to predict, the Board is confident that given its strong 
financial  footing,  technology,  capabilities,  niches  and  its  sector  penetration  in  areas  which  are  political  priorities,  for 
example in transportation and medical, it is well placed to navigate these exceptional trading conditions. 

N Rogers 
Chairman 
13 July 2021 

5 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
STRATEGIC REPORT 

Introduction to Solid State PLC 

The Group supplies electronic products, technology, and solutions, primarily designed for demanding applications where 
safety, performance, reliability and quality are critical; enabling customers to focus on their core business with confidence 
by providing trusted technology for demanding applications. 

Solid State’s mission and strategy to deliver growth 

The Group’s mission is “To remain at the forefront of electronics technology, delivering reliable, high quality products and 
services; adding value at every opportunity, from enquiry to order fulfilment; consistently meeting customer and partner 
expectations.” 

The Group’s stated strategy to deliver this has three key elements: 

1)  Development of a portfolio of products, solutions and value-added services through the combination of developing 
own brand devices and systems and establishing strategic partnerships with suppliers within the electronics industry 
enabling the Group to add real value to existing and new customers; 
Investment in the Group workforce, technical knowledge, and resources to ensure Solid State remains at the forefront 
of electronics technology. Constantly seeking opportunity to add value, satisfying the customers’ unmet needs and 
establishing long term relationships as a trusted advisor and subject matter expert;  

2) 

3)  Supplement organic expansion from target structural growth markets with selective acquisitions within the electronics 
industry which complement the existing Group capabilities. Focussing on further extending technical knowhow, own 
brand product, geographic reach and capacity will facilitate the international expansion of the Group and accelerate 
progress in its target growth markets. 

The Group is focused on the supply and support of specialist electronics equipment and solutions from components, sub-
assemblies, products, and embedded systems, through to complete integrated electronic solutions.  

The market for the Group’s products and services is driven by the need for bespoke electronic solutions to address complex 
needs, typically in harsh environments where enhanced durability and resistance to extremes of humidity, temperature, 
pressure, vibration, and wind is vital.  

The Group’s organic growth strategy is based on targeting the structural growth markets of security & defence, medical, 
greentech, transport, energy, utilities, communications and industrial where there is significant Government and industry 
investment in technology aligned to the Group’s strengths. In implementing this strategy, the Group will continue to focus 
on retaining its diverse, customer and sector exposure ensuring the Group maintains the resilience it has benefited from in 
recent times.  

The Group actively targets markets with high barriers to entry, requiring accreditations and specialist test and measurement 
capabilities.  This  enables  the  business  to  differentiate  its  offering,  develop  long  term  symbiotic  customer  relationships 
where premium products and services are valued and reflected in the margins. 

The Group holds multiple accreditations across its sites covering health and safety, environmental, international aerospace 
standards, Atex and others.  Where necessary the facilities and personnel are cleared by the UK Government to allow secure 
work to be conducted. The Group continues its investment to increase the range and scope of accredited sites. 

The Group has industry leading test & measurement and assembly capabilities, including a Class 7 clean room assembly 
facility, environmental and vibration testing capabilities, and a world class near-field RF test chamber.  

In  the  current  year,  the  Group  has  made  significant  investments  further  enhancing  its  manufacturing  and  assembly 
capabilities with new wire bonding capabilities and investment in an in-house EMC chamber commissioned during first 
quarter  of  FY21/22.  These  facilities  combined  with  the  technical  and  engineering  expertise  mean  the  Group  has  a 
differentiated offering, providing class leading test and measurement capabilities which are utilised across the Group. 

A  cornerstone  of  the  Group’s  offering  is  its  industry  leading  workforce.  To  ensure  the  Group  builds  on  this,  it  invests 
significantly  in  the  development  of  its  technical  staff  and  and  other  professional  personnel,  through  a  combination  of 
internal and external training and development programmes to ensure they remain as industry experts at the forefront of 
their  respective  technology  areas.    Furthermore,  the  Group  is  constantly  looking  to  broaden  the  talent  pool  through 
recruitment. 

6 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
STRATEGIC REPORT (continued) 

Solid State PLC operating structure 

The Group has two operating divisions, Value Added Supplies (VAS) and Manufacturing, with a shared mission, strategy and 
consistent business values. Solid State thrives on a trusted advisor relationship with its customers. 

The  Group’s  principal  operations  are  based  in  the  UK  with  its  head  office  in  Redditch  where  its  component  supplies 
warehousing  and  computing  product  manufacturing  are  located.    The  Group’s  Power  business  unit  (BU)  battery  pack 
manufacturing centre of excellence is in Crewkerne, with Leominster housing the Group’s Communications BU. The recent 
acquisitions have added industry leading opto-electronic assembly capabilities in Weymouth, computing board level design 
and production and component warehousing facilities near to London Heathrow and Gatwick, respectively. Furthermore, 
the  acquisitions  have  provided  a  more  established  sales  function  in  the  USA  as  well  as  a  significant  freehold  R&D  and 
manufacturing facility for some of the electromechanical products in Elkhart Indiana, which with further investment has 
significant capacity for growth. 

Value Added Services 

The VAS division primarily supplies designed-in products and solutions at the component and sub assembly level. It is a 
market leader, delivering innovative, designed-in technical solutions for customers. The division serves the needs of the 
original equipment manufacturing (OEM) and the contract electronics manufacturing (CEM) communities principally in the 
UK, albeit latterly the acquisition of Willow Technology Group (Willow Technologies Limited and AEC Inc) has accelerated 
the development of its international sales channels. 

VAS  represents  a  select  number  of  suppliers  who  manufacture  semiconductors,  related  electronic  and  opto-electronic 
components,  modules,  sensors,  switches  and  displays  as  well  as  more  recently  developing  a  portfolio  of  own  brand 
components with the acquisitions of Pacer (opto-electronic components) and Willow (electromechanical components). The 
team’s  depth  of  understanding  of  these  products  and  components  enables  the  Group  to  offer  outstanding  levels  of 
commercial and “added value” technical support to its customers. 

The  products  and  components  supplied  are  from  globally  recognised  manufacturers  and  include  those  for  5G  and  the 
Internet  of  Things  (IoT),  embedded  processing,  control,  wireless  and  wired  communications,  electromechanical,  power 
management, optical emitters, and sensors, displays and LED lighting. 

Manufacturing 

Operating with three principal BUs; computing, power and communications, the Manufacturing division is a market leader 
with capabilities extending from the supply of simple electronics technology products and systems to the delivery of turnkey 
integrated solutions with significant engineering-based value-added content.  Capabilities encompass design, production, 
testing, commissioning, and training. 

The  Division  manufactures  high  specification  industrial  computers,  sophisticated  custom  battery  packs  and  advanced 
communication  systems,  including  specialist  antennas  and  high-performance  video  transmission  products.  Latterly  the 
acquisition  of  Active  Silicon,  has  enhanced  the  Division’s  computing  offering  to  include  board  level  design  and 
manufacturing capabilities primarily for image capture, processing, and transmission. It is the technical knowhow, design 
skills,  production  and  testing  resources,  product  quality  and  customer  service  levels  combined  with  over  30  years  of 
experience of supplying products into the most demanding of environments that provides significant differentiation from 
the Group’s competitors across the three BUs.  

Consistent with the VAS division, the strong and established partnerships with key suppliers in Asia and the USA are critical 
(including industry leading technology partners) and include Nvidia, IEI, Intel, Innodisk, Tadiran, Panasonic, LG, Cisco and 
Persistent Systems. 

Competitive Advantage 

The Group is the subject matter expert  for its customers, with deep industry knowledge and longstanding key supplier 
relationships.  In designing-in solutions to address the customer needs, the Group selects the most appropriate component, 
module,  computing  technology,  battery  chemistry,  or  communications  solution  which  ensures  Solid  State  is  a  trusted 
partner. 

The  Group  constantly  seeks  to  add  value  for  its  customers,  who  are  typically  looking  to  embrace  the  adoption  of  the 
enabling technologies where Solid State has industry leading component and manufacturing expertise, such as electronic 
and  optoelectronic  component  design-in,  image  processing,  Artificial  Intelligence  (AI),  IOT,  fossil  fuel  replacement, 
switching, cordless & portable power, and leading-edge communications / antenna solutions. 

7 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
STRATEGIC REPORT (continued) 

Chief Executive’s Review 

Given  the  macro-economic  backdrop  (with  the  COVID-19  pandemic  and  latterly  Brexit  and  semiconductor  supply 
shortages), this reporting period was undoubtedly one of the most challenging in the Group’s 50 year history.  As a result, 
I am very pleased to report 18% growth in adjusted earnings per share over the prior year’s record result and revenue 
broadly comparable year on year at £66.3m (2019/20: £67.4m). The Group benefitted from one month of revenue from 
the two acquisitions and some pull  ins of  demand at the end of the year as its customers looked to mitigate the  well-
publicised electronics supply chain issues. Despite these challenges, the Group has been able to make significant strides in 
delivering on its growth strategy in the current year.  

Solid State reports a strong year-end balance sheet with net assets of £25.5m and net cash at the bank of £3.2m (excluding 
lease and deferred contingent consideration obligations). The balance sheet strength means the Group is well placed to 
gain a competitive advantage when managing the challenging market conditions. Building on last year’s record performance 
we look forward to delivering further strategic progress. 

The scale and broader portfolio of products now offered by the Group’s VAS  division, has enabled VAS revenues to be 
broadly  maintained  year  on  year,  significantly  outperforming  a  market  which  saw  a  decline  across  ‘all  electronic 
components’ of 4% and a 12% decline for ‘semiconductor’ sales. The reduction in revenues from the Manufacturing Division 
was more than mitigated by improved margins and lower operating costs which resulted in a significant improvement in 
profitability. 

Managing the COVID-19 pandemic 

During the initial few months of the pandemic, the Group faced some reductions in demand.  In managing this, the Group 
utilised the Government’s Coronavirus Job Retention Scheme (CJRS). At the half year, resources were adjusted to align with 
ongoing demand resulting in a small number of redundancies. The CJRS grants received of £0.3m allowed the Group to 
retain its skilled work force while it evaluated how demand would stabilise and then recover, minimising redundancies. Had 
the CJRS not been available the level of redundancies would have been more significant at the start of the pandemic. 

The Group’s sector diversity has enabled it to substantially mitigate the COVID-19 challenges faced in the oil and gas and 
commercial  aerospace  sectors  with  strong  demand  in  other  markets  including  security  and  defence,  medical  and 
transportation.  

The Group’s operational response to the COVID-19 pandemic was pro-active and swift which has meant the business has 
faced no significant operational disruption. Solid State’s adoption of Office 365 ahead of the pandemic was timely meaning 
the workforce was largely set up for home working. The production workforce was engaged and integral in establishing the 
Group’s COVID safe protocols from the outset to ensure that the business could continue to operate safely as a nominated 
critical supplier continuing to fulfil customer demand. 

Key stakeholder engagement 

Solid  State’s  pro-active  approach  to  managing  both  customer  and  supplier  stakeholders  during  the  year  has  been 
recognised positively with many providing positive feedback about how the Group has supported their businesses in these 
very difficult times. This is evidenced by the Group being awarded 4 formal supplier / customer awards recognising the 
Group’s value to their businesses. 

Through the pandemic the business has worked hard to ensure that it has maintained timely and relevant communication 
and engagement with all stakeholders. The teamwork, support, and commitment from and by the staff has been a real 
success  factor.  The  workforce  has  recognised  and  valued  the  investment  in  enhancing  the  Group’s  staff  welfare 
programmes  to  provide  both  physical  and  mental  health  support,  resources  and  benefits  which  are  available  to  all 
employees to provide some mitigation to the challenges presented by lockdown and remote working. 

The  Group  continues  to  recognise  the  value  of,  and  invest  in,  its  staff  with  various  ongoing  professional  development 
initiatives.  This  is  critical  to  the  Group  continuing  to  both  retain  and  attract  exceptionally  high  calibre  staff  which  is 
necessary to maintain its market position and retain its trusted business partner relationships. 

Two  of  the  initiatives  instigated  as  part  of  the  Group’s  staff  and  communities  engagement  activities  were  particularly 
rewarding and were highlights of the year; being the Solid State lockdown charity walk, where as a team the staff walked 
the equivalent length of England raising in excess of £10,000 for NHS Charities Together, and the support for a local Redditch 
school where the Group was able to supply much needed IT equipment supporting families who did not have access to 
these resources at home. 

8 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
STRATEGIC REPORT (continued) 

Delivery of the strategy 

In FY20/21 Solid State has continued to execute on its strategy, delivering improved financial performance with important 
strategic steps being taken across both operating divisions. 

VAS broadening complementary component offering 

The VAS division has continued to broaden its component product lines through a new relationship with TT Electronics. 
Additionally, the VAS division continues to enter into value-added partnerships including Wireless Logic (Europe’s leading 
provider  of  SIM  connectivity  and  Routers  for  M2M  and  IoT  connectivity)  and  InVMA  (a  leading  provider  of  IoT  asset 
management  systems).  These  new  relationships  adding  to  the  Group’s  existing  product  suppliers,  combined  with  a 
partnership with ByteSnap Design Ltd (leading IOT design solutions consultants), mean the Group has a leading-edge end 
to end IoT offering which is a key technology growth driver in the market. 

VAS development of own brand component manufacturing 

The acquisition of Willow brought a portfolio of electro-mechanical products including a range of sensors and switches with 
key electronics manufacturers such as Rohm and Teledyne. These products are particularly well suited to the green energy 
and  power  markets.  The  enhanced  scale,  capabilities,  and  market  position  ideally  places  the  Group  to  target  growth 
opportunities which would not have been previously attainable. 

Furthermore,  the  acquisition  of  Willow  provided  a  step  change  in  the  portfolio  of  own  brand  components  with  the 
Hermaseal® and Durakool® brands as well as a small number of patented contactor products which may provide significant 
opportunities in the mid-term for the EV charging market. 

Willow  has  an  established  component  manufacturing,  R&D,  and  sales  capability  in  Elkhart,  Indiana,  USA  which  with  its 
European sales and technical resources mean approximately 70% of Willow’s sales are from outside the UK. This provides 
a platform, establishing the foundations for the Group’s international offering which is a strategic priority. 

Manufacturing portfolio of own brand modular products 

Within  the  Manufacturing  division,  the  Group  has  made  significant  progress  in  developing  its  portfolio  of  own  brand 
products in all three BUs, with the introduction of new 1, 2 and 4U (rack mounted) servers and PCs based on latest Intel 
CPUs, high density rack-mount edge servers, ideal for high performance computing applications.  A range of 24V and 48V 
modular  battery  packs  have  been  designed  for  reliable  continuous  daily  usage  in  harsh  environments  where  shock, 
vibration,  and  varying  temperatures  are  likely  to  be  experienced.    The  products  are  tailored  to  in-house  battery 
management systems and software. These are critical to the development of the Group’s greentech power solutions and 
fossil  fuel  replacement  products.  The  Communications  BU  has  seen  additional  standard  design  antennas  introduced 
including solutions for use with the Group’s radio products in addition to an integrated mobile command system interfacing 
to the Persistent Systems mesh communications nodes. 

Enhancing our technical manufacturing expertise 

The acquisition of Active Silicon (“Active”) into the computing BU adds board level design and manufacturing capability in 
addition to a portfolio of  machine vision products and solutions. It provides a significant technology enhancement  and 
reflects a strategic step forward from a relatively small acquisition. 

Active’s imaging products and embedded vision systems provide; high margin, differentiated, technology driven solutions 
for  niche  industrial  applications.  Active’s products  and solutions  are  complementary  to  the  Group’s  existing  computing 
offering. There is virtually no overlap in the customer base, and there are opportunities to provide combined solutions to 
the enlarged customer base. Furthermore, the joint capability enables the targeting of new opportunities in growth markets 
which the Group could not have competed for previously.  Pleasingly, post year end a contract for a combined solution has 
been secured with a key customer in the transportation market ahead of management expectations. 

Developing product range for strategic growth markets 

Historically the Group’s Power business was concentrated in oil and gas and aerospace. The strategy over recent years has 
been to target new markets such as robotics and medical to provide resilience. The trading conditions in the traditional 
markets caused by the pandemic validated the strategy where medical market demand was very strong, providing some 
revenue mitigation against those adversely impacted markets. In this period, the commercialisation of the new modular 
power products and solutions was delayed due to customers being cautious in making investments in new technology given 
the pandemic and supply chain uncertainties.  

9 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
STRATEGIC REPORT (continued) 

However, new design in projects and development programmes are restarting as we commence the new financial year, 
giving the Board confidence that the mid-term prospects and demand for these new products will be very strong. 

The Group has developed its portfolio of semi standard antenna products providing stability to complement the traditional 
bespoke  “one  off”  projects.  The  radio  team  is  adding  complementary  communications  and  training  products  to  the 
Persistent Systems radio solution which the Group distributes. The team has made good progress in implementing this 
strategy which has delivered a solid performance across both radios and antennas in the period. The strategy going forward 
into financial year 2021/22 is to target multi-year programmes for the Group’s semi standard antenna solutions, together 
with training and support contracts for the Group’s radio products. These income streams provide annuity revenue, whilst 
seeking additional sensor solutions from third parties to complement the datalinks.  

The strength of the Group 

Cross Group collaboration has been a key strategic focus to ensure the business maximises the commercial value of its 
extensive customer relationships. During the year, the Group wide “Senior Leadership team” was formalised in conjunction 
with the implementation of a Company Share Option Plan (CSOP) to align the incentives of those individuals with Group 
performance. The benefits of this are already starting to be seen with a step change in the cross Group engagement and 
collaboration.  

The acquisitions of Active and Willow provide additional breadth and depth to the Group’s product and technology offering. 
In addition, the enlarged Group’s active customer base now exceeds 2000, presenting significant opportunities to sell more 
of the broadened product range to the enlarged customer base. 

Managing and mitigating risk 

The business risks have been considered and, where practical, mitigated. However, the macroeconomic and geopolitical 
risks  including  COVID-19,  electronic  component  shortages,  uncertainty  in  international  trading  relationships,  and  the 
associated impact on foreign exchange, means it is difficult to predict supply and demand and therefore mitigate fully.  

As a result of the macro environment in the electronics industry, lead times have extended to unprecedented lengths of 
over  40  weeks  for  many  critical  components,  such  as  semiconductors,  computer  processors,  PCBs,  some  embedded 
processing modules, and battery cells. The Group is also seeing and managing fluctuations in freight costs and availability.  

The strength of the balance sheet together with smart purchasing actions is enabling the business to manage these issues 
in the current financial year. Stocking orders were placed with suppliers in the first half of 2020 on some long lead time 
products before customers committed to additional order schedules.  This action should help to mitigate some of the effects 
of the extending lead times seen across the electronics industry. 

Despite  buffer  stock  schedules  and  orders  placed  with  suppliers,  in  Q4,  customers  recognised  the  electronics  industry 
supply chain issues and several customers pulled forward demand which benefitted the FY20/21 out turn. However, these 
pull-ins, in conjunction with extended lead times due to the Suez Canal blockage and low air freight capacity, meant it 
reduced the open orderbook and depleted the Group’s buffer stocks as it enters FY21/22. The Group stock holding was 
lower than expected at £10.6m (2020: £9.7m). This equates to approximately 2.5 months’ stock. 

Opportunity out of adversity 

Order intake since the year end has been strong, with customers placing order schedules as post COVID confidence returns 
and  to  try  to  mitigate  the  supply  chain  issues.  This  provides  increased  confidence  over  customer  demand  albeit,  the 
extended lead times and supply chain challenges, might limit the opportunity to accelerate deliveries and growth in the 
year ahead.  

If the supply chain issues continue to deteriorate, the Group could face disruption and delays to programmes and projects 
in the middle to latter part of the financial year. However, in 2016 the VAS division extended its portfolio of services by 
recruiting a sourcing and obsolescence team. These services are now understandably in high demand and are proving to be 
of real value to the Group itself and to the Group’s customer base in working to source product and mitigate the shortages.   

The Group’s diversity in suppliers, technology, markets, and latterly territory is a key strength.  It provides resilience and 
some mitigation against the global headwinds and has enabled Solid State to deliver a record result. Looking forward to the 
current year, this diversity combined with the strength of the Group’s balance sheet means the Group is well placed to 
weather the impact of any short-term supply chain issues and take advantage of new opportunities.  

10 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
STRATEGIC REPORT (continued) 

Principal risks and uncertainties 

The Group has a process for the identification and management of risk as part of the governance structure operated by the 
Board. Management of risk is the responsibility of the Board of Directors. In managing and mitigating risk, a comprehensive 
and robust system of controls and risk management processes has been developed and implemented by the Board. 

The Board’s role in risk management includes: 

• 
• 
• 
• 
• 
• 

promoting a culture that emphasises integrity at all levels in the business; 
embedding risk management within the core processes of the business; 
setting the appetite for risk; 
determining the principal risks; 
ensuring that these are communicated effectively to the businesses; and, 
setting the overall policies for risk management and control. 

The  principal  risks  affecting  the  Group  are  identified  by  the  Group  Executive  team  within  their  functional  areas  of 
responsibility and are reviewed by the Board. 

In identifying the business risks below, the Group analyses risks across four key areas: 

• 
• 
• 
• 

strategic risk; 
operational risk; 
commercial risk; and, 
financial risk. 

Principal risks and uncertainties 
Acquisition risk – (Strategic risk) 
Business risk 
• 
• 
• 
• 

Loss of key customers. 
Loss of key employees. 
Loss of key suppliers. 
Erosion of Intellectual 
property base. 
Failure to identify and 
complete profitable 
acquisitions. 
Failure to integrate 
management reporting 
structures and control 
disciplines. 

• 

• 

Mitigation and Strategy 
The Group recommenced its acquisition strategy completing 
two transactions just ahead of the year end. In managing 
these deals the following process was adopted: 
•  Rigorous due diligence to ensure that acquisitions can be 

effectively integrated, and all the relevant stakeholders 
are engaged, supportive and aligned. 
Pro-active and early engagement with: 
key customers and suppliers; and, 
o 
o  employees through the on-site presence of Solid 

State PLC management. 

Preparation and execution of a cross functional 
integration plan. 
Continued investment in development of technology in 
the acquired businesses. 

• 

• 

• 

Integration into existing internal control frameworks, 
processes and reporting systems. 

Year on year 
change in 
likelihood: 

Increased 

Potential 
impact: 

Low 

Effect: 

Integration of 
acquired 
business is not 
effective 

11 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
STRATEGIC REPORT (continued) 

Principal risks and uncertainties 
Legislative environment and compliance – (Strategic risk) 
Business risk 
•  Restrictions on business 

Mitigation and Strategy 
• 

because of regulatory lock 
down due to a pandemic. 
•  Brexit and the USA / China 
trade disputes have caused 
an increased level of 
complexity in the legislative 
and trading environment in 
which the Group operates 
•  Overseas competitors are 
favoured in their domestic 
markets 
Failure to comply with 
applicable legislation, to 
include but not limited to: 
o  Export Control and 

• 

International Traffic in 
Arms (ITAR); 
o  Bribery Act; 
o  General Data protection 
regulation (GDPR); and, 
o  Employment legislation 

and company 
legislation. 

Year on year 
change in 
likelihood: 

No change 

Potential 
impact: 

High 

Effect: 

Trading may be 
disrupted / 
restricted, 
reduced sales 
volumes and 
profitability. 

• 

Solid State PLC has continued to trade while being 
compliant with the government’s COVID-19 restrictions. 
The business operates across seven independent 
operational sites, which have remained operational and 
adhered to best practice social distancing and hygiene 
protocols. Measures are in place to ensure that the risk 
of cross-contamination within the business is minimised. 
The Group has invested in technology and equipment to 
ensure that staff who can work from home do so when 
appropriate. 
Post Brexit international trading has become more 
challenging with a significant increase in the 
administrative burden. The Group’s exposure is lower 
than some other companies due to modest levels of EU 
trade. However, it has increased the challenge to 
delivering on the strategy of growing international sales. 
The Group is exploring establishing operations within the 
mainland EU to support the Group’s international growth 
ambitions. The Board believes that the Group’s size and 
diversified structure gives it resilience, and places it in a 
far stronger position than smaller competitors within the 
customers’ supply chains. 

• 

•  Regular reporting of export / ITAR compliance, and 
detailed internal control processes and procedures. 
Continuing education of the Group’s employees on the 
legislative developments and requirements. 
Internal reviews and external audits. 

• 
•  Adopt suitable software systems where appropriate to 
aid export control procedures and assist with other 
compliance issues. 
The individual operating companies maintain operating 
procedures and are certified to internationally 
recognised standards, e.g. ISO 9001-2015, AS9100, 
AS9120, SC21. 

• 

12 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
STRATEGIC REPORT (continued) 

Mitigation and Strategy 
•  Active programme to maintain cross qualified second 

sources of supply. 

•  Rigorous supplier quality management processes. 
•  Maintain close relationships with key suppliers in order 

• 

• 

to be aware of potential supply issues. 
Place scheduled orders and hold buffer stock to minimise 
the effects of extended lead times. 
The mitigation and strategy has meant that through 
FY2020/21 and Q1 FY21/22 the Group has been able to 
manage the disruption and extended lead times with 
limited impact. However if the disruption continues or 
worsens the Group may see delays in project / 
programmes in the middle to later part of the year. 

Principal risks and uncertainties 
Supply chain interruption – (Operational risk) 
Business risk 
• 

The very significant 
electronics supply chain 
challenges caused by the 
perfect storm of factors: 
Surge in technology 
o 
demand (EV, Edge 
devices, 5G, work from 
home) 

o  Natural disasters (COVID-
19 disruption, Tohoko 
earthquake, Texas 
snowstorms, Renesas chip 
factory fire and Suez 
Canal blockage) 
o  Political issues (Huawei 
stocking up chips against 
US boycott, US:China 
relations and North Korea 
Taiwan strait instability). 

Resulting in demand 
outstripping supply resulting 
in long lead times and 
Industry wide component 
shortages. 

supplier  within 

Dependency 
significant 
on 
suppliers  or  dependency  on  a 
qualified 
a 
controlled supply chain. 
Retention of key employees – (Operational risk) 
Business risk 
• 

Loss of key people and 
critical skills. 
Insufficient skilled 
employees. 
Poor engagement and 
morale. 

• 

• 

Mitigation and Strategy 
• 

COVID-19 meant some customers and market sectors 
faced significant challenges resulting in reduced demand. 
During the first half of 2020/21, the Group utilised the 
Government Furlough scheme to help ensure the Group 
retain its skilled work force while demand recovered. 
•  Retention & development of talent is critical to the long 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

term success of the Group. 
Low staff turnover, many employees having been with 
the Group for more than ten years. 
The Group encourages and invests in CPD and training in 
core skills and competencies as appropriate. 
The Group pro-actively looks to develop its own talent 
and makes use of the government apprenticeship 
schemes. 
The Group pro-actively communicates with its 
employees. 
The Group reviews & benchmarks employee rewards to 
ensure the Group is fairly rewarding its employees. 

13 

Year on year 
change in 
likelihood: 

Increase 

Potential 
impact: 

High 

Effect: 

Quality issues, 
costs, sales 
volumes and 
profitability 

Year on year 
change in 
likelihood: 

Increased 

Potential 
impact: 

Medium 

Effect: 

Quality and or 
service level 
issues rise, and 
costs increased 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
STRATEGIC REPORT (continued) 

Principal risks and uncertainties 
Failure of or malicious damage to IT systems – (Operational risk) 
Business risk 
• 

Mitigation and Strategy 
• 

The inability to access 
business critical data. 
The inability to efficiently run 
the operating companies. 

• 

The existing systems are reliable and functional the 
Group is looking to upgrade and standardise systems 
where appropriate which will offer improved 
functionality in due course supporting the development 
of the business. 
Certified as meeting the “Cyber Essentials” standards 
and in the process of getting “Cyber Essentials Plus” or 
“IASME” where appropriate. 

• 

•  Where businesses are acquired, the Group implement 

the “Cyber Essentials” standards as a key priority if they 
do not already meet this standard and “Cyber Essentials 
Plus / IASME” in due course. 

•  Runs automated daily back-ups of all business critical 

data. 

•  Operates off site storage of business critical data. 
•  Has established, documented, and tested disaster 

recovery plans. 

Natural disasters – (Operational risk) 
Business risk 
•  Natural disaster or medical 
epidemic / pandemic 
disrupts production 
capability, supply of 
materials or customer 
demand. 

Mitigation and Strategy 
• 

The COVID-19 pandemic has impacted the world, 
resulting in restrictions on travel and social and business 
activities. The Group implemented changes to working 
practices to enable the business to continue to meet its 
customer demand while ensuring that the government 
guidance on social distancing in conjunction with 
appropriate hygiene practices were fully embraced. This 
ensures that the risk of cross-contamination within the 
business is minimised. Furthermore, as noted above 
home working has been adopted wherever possible and 
efficient.  
The Group has a documented disaster recovery plan for 
each site. In addition, the Group has business 
interruption insurance, which subject to the terms of the 
cover purchased providing some insurance mitigation. 

• 

Competition risk – (Commercial risk) 
Business risk 
• 

Loss of distribution supplier 
franchise agreement would 
result in significant loss of 
product lines and customers. 
Loss of a major contract / 
customer or business to a 
competitor. 
Price / margin erosion due to 
predatory pricing from a 
competitor. 

• 

• 

Mitigation and Strategy 
• 
Setting a commercial strategy to gain share by:  
Focusing on quality, value and customer service; 
o 
o  Develop and maintain close relationships with suppliers 
and customers to become the “partner of choice”, by 
forming multi-level partnerships; 

o  As a trusted partner providing product solutions from 

design, to pilot & volume production; and, 

o  Winning additional business from existing customers 
and capturing new customers and revenue streams. 
Continue to invest in product development to ensure 
competitive advantage. 
Continued investment in the recruitment of high quality 
personnel. 

• 

• 

14 

Year on year 
change in 
likelihood: 

no change 

Potential 
impact: 

Medium 

Effect: 

Costs, sales, 
profitability and 
reputational 
damage 

Year on year 
change in 
likelihood: 

No change 

Potential 
impact: 

Low 

Effect: 

Trading may be 
disrupted / 
restricted, 
reduced sales 
volumes and 
profitability 

Year on year 
change in 
likelihood: 

no change 

Potential 
impact: 

High 

Effect: 

Loss of market 
share, reduced 
sales volumes 
and profitability 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Year on year 
change in 
likelihood: 

No change 

Potential 
impact: 

Medium 

Effect: 

Sales volumes 
and profitability 

Year on year 
change in 
likelihood: 

Increased 

Potential 
impact: 

High 

Effect: 

Going concern / 
Financial loss 
and 
reputational 
damage 

STRATEGIC REPORT (continued) 

Principal risks and uncertainties 
Product / Technology change – (Commercial risk) 
Business risk 
• 

Mitigation and Strategy 
• 

Failure to maintain the 
Group’s leading technical 
capabilities and knowledge 
which allows us to develop 
electronic solutions in 
partnership with the Group’s 
customers. 
Failure to manufacture 
solutions that meet the 
agreed specification. 
Failure of key distribution 
franchises to innovate and 
introduce new products. 

Continued investment in the technical training and 
development of sales, engineering and operations staff, 
building their capabilities. 
Investment in joint R&D programmes with partners to 
ensure the Group is at the forefront of technical 
electronic solutions. 

• 

•  Maintain rigorous quality and engineering control 

processes to ensure that the Group’s products meet the 
required specifications. 
Perform all necessary detailed product testing to ensure 
that products are fit for purpose. 
Continuously seek new franchises and partners at the 
forefront of electronics technology. 

• 

• 

Forecasting and financial liquidity – (Financial risk) 
Business risk 
• 

Mitigation and Strategy 
• 

• 

• 

• 

The business does not 
maintain sufficient funding 
and liquidity to meet its 
obligations as they fall due. 
The business commits to a 
materially significant loss 
making contract. 

The Group prepares financial forecasts to evaluate the 
level of funding required for the foreseeable future. 
These forecasts are reviewed and approved by the 
Board. 
Extensive disclosure has been provided in respect of 
going concern and longer term viability (see page 37, 38 
and 75) 

• 

•  Based on these forecasts appropriate funding and 
liquidity solutions are put in place to ensure that 
adequate headroom is maintained. 

•  At the year-end 31 March 2021, the Group had an 

revolving credit facility of £7.5m (£3.75m undrawn) and 
the Group had net cash (excluding deferred contingent 
consideration and lease obligations) of £3.16m (2020: 
£3.18m).  
The Group has a defined delegation of authority matrix 
and contract risk register. 

• 

15 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
STRATEGIC REPORT (continued) 

Chief Financial Officer’s Review 

In order to provide a fuller understanding of the Group’s ongoing underlying performance, a number of adjusted profit 
measures as supplementary information are included, on a consistent basis with that reported by the financial analysts that 
review our business. As detailed in note 32, the adjusted measures eliminate the impact of certain non-cash charges and 
non-recurring items together with the associated tax impact. 

Revenues 

Group revenues from continuing operations of £66.3m were comparable with the prior year (2020: £67.4m) despite the 
adverse impact of COVID-19. The results included one month of revenue from the two acquisitions totalling £1.3m and the 
benefit of customer demand being pulled forward as a result of the well publicised supply chain challenges. Like-for-like 
revenue adjusted to exclude the impact of the two acquisitions was down 3.6% at £65.0m (2020: £67.4m). 

As reported above, the UK electronics distribution and semiconductor components industry faced a declining market of 
circa 12% over the period (source ECSN). Despite this, the VAS division significantly outperformed the  market and as a 
whole performed well, delivering broadly comparable revenue at £39.0m with like-for-like revenues marginally down on 
the prior year at £38.1m (2020: £39.2m). 

The Manufacturing division reported revenue of £27.3m, with like-for-like revenue of £26.9m (2020: £28.2m) down 4.6%, 
however,  improved  operating  margins  mitigate  the  profit  impact.  The  resilient  performance  in  FY20/21  against  a  very 
challenging macro-economic backdrop reflects the successful scaling of resources to deliver the production demand. This 
has improved the efficiency of the Group which combined with stable margins and cost mitigation has delivered a record 
profit before tax in spite of the small reduction in revenues. 

Gross profit 

Reported gross margins of £19.9m (2020: £20.8m) are down £0.9m. There is an adverse impact of acquisition accounting 
charges in the year and the benefit of the sale of some legacy fully written down manufacturing inventory in the prior year 
which have been excluded in the adjusted underlying gross margins (see note 32). 

Underlying gross profit for the year is down £0.6m to £20.0m (2020: £20.6m), reflecting a slight margin decrease to 30.2% 
(2020: 30.6%) driven by a slightly lower margin within the VAS division at 24.2% (2020: 24.8%) due to a change in the mix 
of component sales albeit individual component margins are being maintained. The acquisition of Willow is expected to be 
margin accretive to the VAS division as they have a higher proportion of own brand manufactured components. Pleasingly, 
year on year the manufacturing margins continued to be strong at 38.7% (2020: 38.7%). 

VAS contributed gross margin of £9.4m (2020: £9.7m), Manufacturing division contributed £10.6m (2020: £10.9m) both 
down 3% on the prior year, which given the tough trading environment is a resilient result. 

Sales, general and administration expenses 

Sales, general and administration (SG&A) expenses of £15.6m (2020: £16.7m) decreased by £1.1m.  

The decrease is primarily due to savings made primarily because of the COVID-19 restrictions on business activities such as 
travel, marketing, and events. In addition, because of the reduced customer demand when COVID-19 hit we utilised the 
Coronavirus Job Retention Scheme  (CJRS) in the  first half  of the year  where we received £0.3m of grant income  which 
enabled  the  Group  to  retain  its  skilled  work  force  while  it  evaluated  how  demand  would  stabilise  and  then  recover, 
minimising redundancies. 

Furthermore, within the SG&A is Depreciation & Amortisation (D&A) and Share Based Payment (SBP) charges of £2.1m 
(2020: £2.2m) and £0.2m (2020: £0.4m) respectively.  

Adjusted SG&A expenses from continuing operations decreased by £1.1m to £14.5m (2020: £15.8m) reflecting the exclusion 
of £0.3m of one-off deal related expenses compared to the reported variance above. 

Operating profit  

Adjusted operating margins increased to 8.3% (2020: 7.2%) with adjusted operating profit from continuing operations up 
14.6% to £5.5m (2020: £4.8m) reflecting the overhead savings while limiting the reduction in margins. Reported operating 
profit was up 4.9% to £4.3m (2020: £4.1m). The adjustments to operating profit are set out in further detail in note 32. 

16 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
STRATEGIC REPORT (continued) 

Operating profit – cont’  

We have recognised £0.01m (2020: £0.02m) within operating profit in respect of Research and Development Expenditure 
Credit (RDEC) in addition to the tax credits recognised within the tax line, where we are eligible for the SME R&D tax scheme. 
These development programmes are a cornerstone of the Group’s future high value add revenue streams. 

Profit before tax 

Adjusted profit before tax was up 14.9% to £5.4m (2020: £4.7m). Reported profit before tax was up 5.0% to £4.2m (2020: 
£4.0m).  This  is  reported  after  a  share  based  payments  charge  of  £0.2m  (2020:  £0.4m),  amortisation  of  acquisition 
intangibles of £0.7m (2020: £0.5m) and exceptional items of £0.3m (2020: £0.2m credit). 

Profit after tax 

The Group benefits from the R&D tax credit scheme which reduces the underlying effective tax rate for the year to 12% 
(2020: 15%) from the standard rate of 19%. As the Group grows, and profitability increases the benefit of R&D tax credits 
diminishes and it will also no longer be eligible for the SME scheme.  

Adjusted profit after tax was up 17.5% to £4.7m (2020: £4.0m). Reported profit after tax was up 17.6% to £4.0m (2020: 
£3.4m), as we benefitted from an additional £0.2m of R&D tax credits which are not expected to be recurring. 

EPS 

Adjusted fully diluted earnings per share from continuing operations for the year ended 31 March 2021 is up 18.1% at 54.7p 
(2020: 46.3p). Reported fully diluted earnings per share from continuing operations is up 15.7% at 45.7p (2020: 39.5p). 

Cash flow from operations 

Cash inflow from operations for the year of £6.9m is down from £8.0m in 2020 primarily due to a reduction in the working 
capital inflow to £0.4m (2020: £1.4m). This delivers an underlying operating cash conversion percentage of 127% (2020: 
165%) and a reported operating cash conversion percentage of 162% (2020: 197%). 

There was a working capital cash inflow in the period of £0.4m due to a decrease in receivables and inventories of £1.9m 
each offset in part by a decrease in payables of £3.4m. The reduction in inventories reflects the pull forward in demand and 
delays we have faced in receiving scheduled orders despite placing extended order cover with our suppliers. 

Investing activities  

During the year, the Group invested £0.4m (2020: £0.6m) in property plant and equipment, and £0.3m (2020: £0.3m) in 
software and research and development intangibles.  

The capital expenditure reflects significant investment in IT hardware across the Group of £0.3m. This aside, the investment 
has been minimised due to COVID-19 albeit the capital expenditure recommenced towards the end of the year which is 
reflected in year end capital commitments of £0.4m. 

Financing activities 

The Group has entered or extended leases during the year which has resulted in the recognition of £1.2m of additional right 
of use assets with a corresponding right of use liability, in accordance with IFRS16. Cash payments were made in the period 
in respect of lease liabilities of £0.6m. 

The financing activities reflect the final repayment of the last £0.3m of the term loan which was repaid in May 2020 and 
the drawdown of £3.75m of the revolving credit facility (RCF) to fund the acquisition of Willow Technologies Group and 
Active Silicon Group at the end of the year. Solid State continues to have a strong relationship with Lloyds Bank and, having 
repaid the term loan early, Lloyds has extended the term of the £7.5m (2020: £7.5m) revolving credit facility which is now 
committed until the 30 November 2022. At the 31 March 2021 £3.75m of the facility was drawn.  

Pleasingly, as a result of the strong cash generation on 31 March 2021 the Group had net cash (excluding deferred and 
contingent considerations and IFRS16 lease obligations) of £3.2m (2020: £3.2m) which, in conjunction with the unutilised 
bank facilities, provides significant funding headroom to pay the deferred consideration. 

17 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
STRATEGIC REPORT (continued) 

Financing activities – cont’ 

The Group has deferred contingent consideration liabilities where at the 31 March 2021 the fair value has been estimated 
to be £7.5m, of which £2.6m was paid in Q1 2021/22. Subject to the acquired businesses meeting the earn out performance 
targets it is expected that approximately £4.25m will be payable in Q1 2022/23 and the remainder payable in Q1 2023/24. 

The Group paid out £1.2m (2020: £1.2m) in respect of dividends and purchase of own shares. 

Statement of financial position 

During the year, the Group has continued to strengthen its balance sheet position. The Group’s net assets have increased 
to  £25.5m  (2020:  £22.5m)  reflecting  the  retained  profits  in  the  year.  Furthermore,  excluding  deferred  and  contingent 
considerations and IFRS16 lease obligations the Group has maintained a net cash position with £3.2m at the year end (2020: 
£3.2m) having paid £4.1m (net of cash acquired) initial consideration for the acquisitions of the Active Silicon and Willow 
Technologies Groups. 

Primarily as a result of the acquisitions of Active Silicon and Willow Technologies, the Group has seen a significant increase 
in non-current assets totalling £10.4m. Property plant and equipment net book value has increased by £0.7m which includes 
the  Group’s  first  freehold  building  in  Elkhart  Indiana  USA.  Intangible  assets  net  book  value  has  increased  £8.3m  which 
primarily reflects the recognition of acquisition intangibles at fair value of £5.4m and goodwill of £3.6m. 

Dividend 

The Board is proposing a final dividend of 10.75p (2020: 7.25p), giving a full year dividend of 16.0p (2020: 12.5p) as set out 
in the Chairman’s statement on page 5.  

KPIs 

In addition to the KPI information provided in the Chairman’s Report and this Strategic Report, the Directors use several 
key performance indicators to manage the business, disclosed in the financial review on pages 16 to 18. Non-financial 
KPIs are not disclosed other than in the environmental CO2e reporting on page 20. 

Outlook 

During the financial year customer order schedules shortened significantly, resulting in a reduction in the legacy Group like-
for-like open orderbook of £33.7m (2020: £39.9m). Positively, post year end the Group has seen record order intake which 
has increased the enlarged Group open order book at the 31 May 2021 to £51.0m which is up 23% from £41.3m on 31 
March 2021. This provides confidence over customer demand for the coming year. 

As  Solid  State  looks  forward  to  FY21/22,  the  well-publicised  supply  chain  issues  within  the  electronics  and  particularly 
semiconductor  sector  mean  the  Group  continues  to  face  inconsistencies  in  the  traditional  supply  and  order  fulfilment 
balance which may result in some projects being delayed.  Solid State has faced these challenges before, and the strength 
of the Group’s balance sheet means the Group is better placed to manage the working capital demands than some of its 
smaller competitors, which is presenting new customer opportunities. 

In delivering on Solid State’s acquisition strategy the Group completed two important strategic bolt-on acquisitions towards 
the end of the year which are performing well and are enabling the Group to target new customer opportunities in growth 
markets.  The  Group  continues  to  evaluate  future  acquisition  opportunities  albeit  these  are  at  an  early  stage.  These 
opportunities  are  primarily  focused  on  deepening  the  product  offering  in  the  business  units  of  the  Group  and  further 
expansion of its international footprint. Progress on these potentially international M&A opportunities will be limited while 
travel restrictions remain. The Group will continue to look to be opportunistic should a strategically aligned acquisition 
target arise as we exit the COVID-19 pandemic. 

The continued margin improvement, in conjunction with technology developments both from internal R&D and acquisitions 
across all key sectors of components, computing, power and communications place the Group in a strong position. Having 
completed  the  acquisition  of  Active  Silicon,  the  Manufacturing  division  is  in  a  strong  competitive  position  to  deliver 
profitable  growth  in  the  mid-term.  The  introduction  of  more  own  brand  components  from  the  acquisition  of  Willow 
Technologies presents exciting opportunities for development in the VAS division. 

18 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
STRATEGIC REPORT (continued) 

Outlook – cont’ 

The  Group’s  capital  expenditure  programme  saw  investment  in  state-of-the-art  assembly  equipment  in  Value  Added 
Supplies and the on-going installation of the new EMC test and measurement capability in Manufacturing in the second 
half. In FY21/22 the Group intends to invest in upgrading the production capabilities primarily semi-automation of some of 
the battery production and upgrading some production equipment inherited from the Willow Technologies acquisition to 
improve productivity.  

Having  appointed  a  new  Chairman  and  Senior  Independent  Director  and  completed  two  acquisitions  which  have 
significantly enhanced the scale of the Group, during FY21/22 the Board will update and refocus Solid State’s five-year plan 
for the period 2022 to 2027. 

The Group remains focused on securing quality orders as it strives to achieve the goal set in 2017 to double adjusted EPS 
from 30p to 60p by FY21/22. The Board is confident that the achievements of the last year and the post period end 
growth in open orders demonstrate that Solid State is making good progress towards achieving its goals and that the mid-
term prospects for the Group remain very positive and there are several significant opportunities which the Group is 
currently bidding on which could provide upsides for FY21/22.  

Cautionary statement 

This report contains forward-looking statements that are based on current expectations or beliefs, as well as assumptions 
about future events. These forward-looking statements can be identified by the fact that they do not relate only to historical 
or current facts.  

Forward-looking statements often use words such as anticipate, target, expect, estimate, intend, plan, goal, believe, will, 
may, should, would, could, is confident, or other words of similar meaning.  

Undue reliance should not be placed on any such statements because they speak only as at the date of this document and, 
by their very nature, they are subject to known and unknown risks and uncertainties and can be affected by other factors 
that could cause actual results, and Solid State PLC’s plans and objectives, to differ materially from those expressed or 
implied in the forward-looking statements. 

There  are  a  number  of  factors  which  could  cause  actual  results  to  differ  materially  from  those  expressed  or  implied  in 
forward-looking  statements.  These  risks  and  uncertainties  include,  among  other  factors,  changing  economic,  financial, 
political, business or other market conditions.  

Solid State PLC is under no obligation to revise or update any forward looking statement contained within these financial 
statements, regardless of whether those statements are affected as a result of new information, future events or otherwise, 
save as required by law and regulations.  

The strategic report on pages 6 to 19 has been approved by the Board of Directors and signed on its behalf by: 

G S Marsh 
Chief Executive Officer 
13 July 2021 

19 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
CORPORATE AND SOCIAL RESPONSIBILITY REPORT 

Environmental 

The  Group’s  activities  can  be  summarised  as  largely  supply,  manufacturing/assembly  operations,  combined  with  office 
based  research,  product  development  and  other  commercial  functions,  where  we  essentially  receive  materials  and 
products from suppliers, assemble them into a new product and dispatch them to customers. 

The most significant impact on the environment, over which the Group has some control, is the sourcing of products and 
materials (primarily from Asia and USA) and the supply of finished product to customers (Scope 3 carbon impact). To date 
the Group has not been able to capture and assess the level of Scope 3 Carbon it has consumed to meet additional voluntary 
disclosure requirements, however the Group does capture its scope 1 and 2 carbon consumption data.  

As part of the current year activities, we have started to evaluate “what and how” we might approach capturing the data 
from our scope 3 emissions. This is an important step in continuing to deliver on reducing the Group’s carbon footprint and 
part of integrating the Group’s ESG strategy within the 2022-2027 Group strategy review which is underway. 

The most significant component of the Group’s scope 3 emissions is expected to be the impact of third-party carriers the 
Group utilises to receive and deliver their products to customers. The Group’s ability to control the environmental impact 
of its logistics partners is not absolute. However, we can and do look to use preferred suppliers who are positively engaged 
with a carbon reduction commitment to align with our ambitions. The first potential step change that we are exploring is 
to move where possible our inbound freight to sea freight rather than air freight given the significant environmental benefit 
of sea freight vs air freight.  

In terms of the Scope 1 and 2 emissions, the operations  consume normal business energy sources such as heating and 
power, which the Group aims to minimise by focusing on minimising energy consumption through the efficient operating 
practices  and  compliance  with  relevant  environmental  legislation.  However,  the  largest  factor  impacting  energy 
consumption in our facilities is the weather. In a year with moderate summer / winter weather our energy consumption is 
low, however if we face extreme hot / cold weather the energy consumption increases significantly. 

Waste management is a critical part of conducting our business. We comply with all the relevant waste legislation with the 
key  areas  of  legislation  being  The  Waste  Batteries  and  Accumulators  Regulations  2009  and  the  Waste  Electrical  and 
Electronic Equipment (WEEE) Directive in conjunction with RoHS. 

Where appropriate the Group actively works with its customers which is seen as tangible value to ensure that all hazardous 
waste is properly managed. In complying with the waste legislation, the Group ensures that all waste is disposed of properly 
and waste is recycled where it is practicable to do so.  

The Group has a fleet of company cars which have been included in the Group’s carbon reporting. The Group is actively 
moving  the  company  owned  cars  to  be  low  CO2,  Hybrid  or  Electric  vehicles  as  they  are  replaced.  All  Group  facilities 
participate  in  recycling  paper,  plastic  and  cardboard.  Local  management  teams  are  committed  to  good  environmental 
practices and are responsible for implementing appropriate programmes to meet their local obligations. 

As a company quoted on AIM the Group is required to report its scope 1 and scope 2 CO2e, the Board believes there are 
direct benefits to our organisation in the measuring and reporting of environmental performance, which should assist the 
Group to reduce its energy consumption and therefore resource costs, as well as gaining a better understanding of the 
Group’s exposure to the risks of climate change.  

This is year 2 of collecting the data which can be compared to the baseline CO2 consumption for the financial year 2019–
20. Where possible the Group has reported its figures using billed data, which relates to its premises and activities.  

Data  has  been  collected  for  the  following  CO2  emission  sources:  electricity  consumption;  gas  consumption;  water 
consumption; company owned vehicles and waste processing. In collating this data, we have utilised the 2020 conversion 
factors (2020: 2019 conversion factors) to obtain a figure for the CO2 consumption of the Group compared to the baseline 
reported last year. 

In 2019/20 our baseline was 434 tonnes of CO2e which equates to 1,843,758 kwh. We have seen a significant reduction in 
2020/21 as a result of the reduction in travel and activity as a result of the COVID-19 restrictions to 226 tonnes of CO2e 
which equates to 1,015,162 kwh, which is positive however we do not expect to sustain this as returning to a new normal 
will reintroduce some of the travel and extra CO2e from our facilities with increased office activities. 

20 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
CORPORATE AND SOCIAL RESPONSIBILITY REPORT 
 (continued) 

Environmental – cont’ 

In addition, we have also calculated an intensity ratio based on added value. Added value is used as the intensity ratio 
(CO2e / £1M added value). The Group defined “added value” as the “gross margin”. It is believed that this best represents 
business  output and  is  therefore  a  valuable  metric  against  which  to  judge  environmental  performance.  In  2019/20  our 
baseline intensity ratio was 20.9 Tonnes per £1m of value added in the current year, we also saw a significant reduction to 
11.3 Tonnes per £1m of value added. The reduction seen in 2021 is positive however we anticipate a return towards the 
levels seen in 2020 in 2022 albeit we expect to see a reduction from the actions we continue to take to reduce our carbon 
consumption. 

Code of business conduct, ethics, and anti-corruption 

The Group’s policy sets out the values and standards of behaviour expected from all employees. In addition, it addresses 
expectations relating to the day-to-day conduct of business partners and agents who act as representatives of the Group.  

The policy also deals with how employees, business partners and agents can report any concerns that may arise. The policy 
actively promotes corporate social responsibility across our Group. It addresses how the Group works with a wide range of 
third-party organisations in areas such as ethical employment policies, educational and community work. 

It sets out the responsibilities of employees in ensuring that they carry out their business activities in a manner aligned with 
the Group’s values and business principles.  

All staff are required to ensure that they comply with all relevant laws and regulations of the countries in which we operate 
and  do  business.  The  policies  also  set  out  behaviours  that  are  unacceptable  and  which  could  bring  Solid  State  PLC’s 
reputation into disrepute. 

The policy contains guidance on avoiding conflicts of interest, confidentiality, adherence to export controls, our approach 
to gifts and hospitality, bribery and corruption and managing relationships with third parties. 

Upholding the policy is the responsibility of all Solid State PLC employees and business partners. We actively encourage 
everyone to report any behaviour which may be in breach of the Code, is unethical or illegal. This is achieved by fostering 
a culture of openness and accountability, and by providing a clear procedure that enables any individual to raise breaches 
of policy or malpractice directly at the highest level. 

All those working for, or on behalf of, Solid State PLC are required to confirm that they have read and understood the Anti-
corruption & Bribery Policy, and a copy of the policy is readily available to all employees. 

Bribery Act 

The Group implements and enforces effective systems to uphold a zero tolerance approach to bribery and corruption. To 
ensure it only works with third parties whose standards are consistent with the Group’s, all agents and third parties who 
act on behalf of the Group are obliged by written agreement to comply with the standards set out in the Group’s Anti-
corruption & Bribery Policy. 

Commercial business practices 

The Group is committed to acting professionally, fairly and with integrity in all our business dealings and relationships. We 
work with our partners to adopt best business practices, which include: 

In our dealings with customers 

Working closely in partnership with customers and potential customers to help us improve the value we can add to them 
through our products and services; 

Being open and honest about our products and services, communicating with customers all appropriate information they 
need to ensure we consistently meet their expectations; 

Ensuring that any issues or problems are dealt with efficiently, with fairness and in a timely manner; 

Ensuring that we seek feedback to benchmark and evaluate what we do in order to help us deliver continuous improvement 
in our products and services to maintain our value. 

21 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
CORPORATE AND SOCIAL RESPONSIBILITY REPORT 
 (continued) 

In our dealings with suppliers 

Working with our suppliers to help us improve the value of the products and services we offer to customers with the benefit 
of the access to the supply chain that we have; Identifying and selecting suppliers to work in partnership with using fair and 
reasonable methodologies; 

Identifying and working with suppliers who operate to ethical business standards; 

The  semiconductor  shortages  which  the  industry  is  facing  has  meant  we  are  working  closely  with  suppliers  to  help  us 
improve the value of the products and services we offer customers to the benefit of the supply chain by making the supply 
chain as efficient as possible. We are actively looking to improve the efficiency of the supply chain and stock utilisation to 
meet customer demand wherever possible. 

In our relationships with employees and other stakeholders 

The  Group  ensures  employment  practices  throughout  the  Group  are  fair  and  in  full  compliance  with  employment 
legislation.  The  team  are  encouraged  to  volunteer  and  support  community  activities  and  the  Group  is  supportive  of 
initiatives and projects which enable our staff to make a positive contribution in their communities. 

During  the  current  year  we  have  been  able  to  provide  support  to  a  local  academic  establishment  through  providing IT 
equipment to the school to help to alleviate “digital poverty” which has become a real issue during the COVID-19 pandemic 
where families were forced to embrace home and on-line schooling.  

Furthermore, the Group continue to support employees participating in voluntary mentoring and business advisory services 
via professional bodies and educational institutions which provide fantastic development opportunities for all. 

How we invest in our people 

The Group’s success depends on its people. The Group recognises the important role its employees play, and that effective 
teamwork is critical to achieving its corporate goals. 

The  Group  is  committed  to  making  Solid  State  a  “great  place  to  work”  where  the  teams’  actions  and  behaviours 
demonstrate  this  commitment  each  and  every  day.  This  is  aimed  at  providing  an  environment  of  teamwork  and 
collaborative respect, where the staff are all valued for their contribution, and everyone is proud to be part of “the Solid 
State team”. 

The  Group  maintains  equality  of  opportunity  in  all  employment  practices,  policies,  and  procedures  regardless  of  race, 
nationality, gender, age, marital status, sexual orientation, disability and religious or political beliefs. As part of our policies, 
we set out our approach to diversity. 

Human rights 

Solid State PLC is committed to respecting the human rights of all those working with or for us. We do not accept any form 
of child or forced labour and we will not do business with anyone who fails to uphold these standards.  

Modern slavery 

The Modern Slavery Act addresses the role of businesses in preventing modern slavery within their organisation and in their 
supply chains. The Group has a zero-tolerance approach to modern slavery and is committed to acting ethically and with 
integrity in all its business dealings and relationships and to implementing and enforcing effective systems and controls to 
ensure modern slavery is not taking place anywhere in its business or in any of its supply chains. The Group has developed 
and implemented policies to comply with the requirements of the UK’s Modern Slavery Act. Reference to the policy may 
be found on the corporate website at www.solidstateplc.com. 

22 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
CORPORATE AND SOCIAL RESPONSIBILITY REPORT 
 (continued) 

Health and Safety 

Solid State PLC places health and safety at the core of all the business activities to ensure a safe working environment for 
everyone involved in the business. As a corner stone of our business operations health and safety reporting is a standing 
item on the Board agenda. 

All employees are encouraged to take an active role in ensuring that our working environment is a safe place to work and 
visit by actively reporting all safety observations and incidents, being involved in safety audits, risk assessments and regular 
awareness training sessions. 

The operations teams are actively involved in electronics industry-wide initiatives, working with industry associations, and 
proactively  registering  under  new  regulatory  directives  such  as  Registration,  Evaluation,  Authorisation  &  restriction  of 
Chemicals (REACH) and Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment recycling (WEEE). 

Confidentiality 

The Group’s policies emphasises the need for confidentiality to be maintained in all our business activities. Maintaining 
confidentiality  is  a  critical  part  of  our  culture.  Our  policy  and  practices  help  to  ensure  that  all  staff  understand  what 
constitutes confidential information and restricts internal access based on a “need to know basis”. 

Information relating to third parties is not disclosed without the third parties’ written consent. Where the Group conducts 
work for customers including government agencies where specific confidentiality requirements exist such as The Official 
Secrets Act, process and procedures are in place to ensure Group complies with these requirements. 

G S Marsh 
Chief Executive Officer 
13 July 2021 

23 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
CORPORATE GOVERNANCE REPORT 

Statement of compliance against the UK Corporate Governance Guidance 

The Board of Directors believes in high standards of corporate governance and is responsible for ensuring that the Group 
has in place appropriate governance practices and is accountable to shareholders for the Group’s performance in this area. 

Solid  State  PLC,  as  a  quoted  company  on  AIM,  a  market  operated  by  The  London  Stock  Exchange  PLC,  is  required  in 
accordance with AIM rule 26 to adopt a corporate governance code. Solid State PLC has chosen to adopt the QCA corporate 
governance code (the “Code”) over the FRCs UK Corporate Governance Code.  

In  adopting  the  Code  the  Directors  have  provided  corporate  governance  disclosures  and  explain  how  the  Group  and 
company adopts the ten principles of the Code in a manner that is considered appropriate for the company. The Code is 
available on the QCA website at: www.theqca.com.    

This  statement  describes  how  the  Group  is  applying  the  relevant  principles  of  governance,  as  set  out  in  the  Code. 
Throughout the year ended 31 March 2021, the Group has applied the principles of the Code. In adopting the Code the 
board has also been cognisant of the guidance issued from other regulatory bodies in respect of best practice corporate 
governance such as the FRC to ensure that the governance framework adopted at Solid State PLC is rigorous, robust and 
appropriate for its size and structure.  

How the corporate governance principles are adopted at Solid State PLC 

The Board considers that throughout 2020/21, Solid State PLC has sought to comply with the “Ten Principles” within the 
code and this report sets out how the Board has done this through the year. This statement addresses the main subject 
areas of the Code namely; delivering growth, maintaining a dynamic management framework, and building trust. 

Principle 

Compliance 
status 

Explanation 

Further disclosure(s) 

Delivering growth 
Principle 1: -“Establish a 
strategy and business 
model which promote 
long-term value for 
shareholders” 

Principle 2: - “Seek to 
understand and meet 
shareholder needs and 
expectations” 

Fully 
compliant 

Fully 
compliant 

Group business strategy is set out 
in the Chairman’s statement and 
the Strategic Review above.  

See the Chairman’s Statement 
on pages 3 to 4 and Strategic 
review on pages 6 to 19. 

Strategic issues, and the 
appropriate business model to 
exploit opportunities and mitigate 
risks, are under continuous review 
by the board. 

Regular meetings are held with 
shareholders at the release of 
interim and full year results, the 
AGM and a number of additional 
ad hoc meetings. 

See further reporting on the 
stakeholder engagement 
provided on page 27 to 28 and 
page 35 of this report and pages 
21 to 23 of the corporate and 
social responsibility report.  

Principle 3: - “Take into 
account wider stakeholder 
and social responsibilities 
and their implications for 
long-term success” 

Fully 
compliant 

Directors and the management 
team adopt a broad view during 
decision making to take 
meaningful account of the impact 
of its business activities on all key 
stakeholder groups. 

See further reporting on the 
stakeholder engagement 
provided on page 27 to 28 of 
this report and pages 21 to 23 
of the corporate and social 
responsibility report. 

24 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
CORPORATE GOVERNANCE REPORT (continued) 

Compliance 
status 

Fully 
compliant 

Principle 

Principle 4: - “Embed 
effective risk 
management, considering 
both opportunities and 
threats, throughout the 
organisation” 

Explanation 

Further disclosure(s) 

The Group operates a system of 
internal controls to safeguard 
Group assets and protect the 
business from identified risks.  

These controls are subject to 
examination during the annual 
external audit process. 

See the principal and emerging 
risks identified and the 
mitigation and the report on its 
risk management processes on 
pages 36 to 38 of this report and 
on pages 11 to 15 of the strategic 
report. 

Maintain a dynamic management framework 
Principle 5: - “Maintain 
the board as a well-
functioning, balanced 
team led by the chair” 

Fully 
compliant 

At the year-end the Board 
comprises the Non-Executive 
Chairman; Mr N Rogers, the Chief 
Executive Officer; Mr G S Marsh, 
three Executive Directors and two 
Non-Executive Directors. 

Fully 
compliant 

Principle 6: - “ensure that 
between them the 
Directors have the 
necessary up-to-date 
experience, skills and 
capabilities” 

The board is satisfied that the 
current composition provides the 
required degree of skills, 
experience, diversity and 
capabilities appropriate to the 
needs of the business, following 
the appointment of Mr N Rogers as 
Chairman and Mr P Magowan as 
Senior Independent Director.  

See the Board and its sub 
committees’ section in this 
report on page 32 to 35. 

See the Board section in this 
report on pages 32 to 35. 

Principle 7: - “Evaluate 
board performance based 
on clear and relevant 
objectives, seeking 
continuous improvement” 

Fully 
compliant 

The Board has completed an 
internal evaluation of performance 
which is led by the Chairman.  

See the Board performance 
evaluation section in this report 
on page 35. 

The Chairman also actively 
encourages self-evaluation by all 
board members, and feedback on 
the conduct and content of board 
meetings.  

The board will continue to keep 
under review whether a more 
structured independent review is 
required in future. 

25 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
CORPORATE GOVERNANCE REPORT (continued) 

Principle 

Principle 8: - “promote a 
corporate culture that is 
based on ethical values and 
behaviours” 

Compliance 
status 

Fully 
compliant 

Explanation 

Further disclosure(s) 

The board expects high ethical and 
moral standards. The board and all 
employees expected to be 
accountable for their actions and 
in compliance with the Company 
handbook. Employees are actively 
encouraged to participate in 
training courses and maintain CPD. 

See the Board section in this 
report on pages 32 to 35 and 
the corporate and social 
responsibility report on pages 
21 to 23. 

Principle 9: - “Maintain 
governance structures and 
processes that are fit for 
purpose and support good 
decision-making by the 
board” 

Fully 
compliant 

The board as a whole take 
responsibility for ensuring 
appropriate corporate governance 
practices are adopted.  

See the Board section in this 
report on pages 32 to 35 and 
the audit committee report on 
pages 39 to 43. 

The roles and responsibilities of 
each of the Directors (including 
committee memberships) are 
clearly defined. 

Fully 
compliant 

Building trust 
Principle 10: -  
“Communicate how the 
company is governed and is 
performing by maintaining 
a dialogue with 
shareholders and other 
relevant stakeholders” 

Regular meetings with 
shareholders and other key 
stakeholder groups provide a 
specific opportunity for raising any 
concerns related to corporate 
governance, including any 
significant votes cast against or 
abstaining from shareholder 
resolutions. 

Further narrative disclosure is 
provided in: Corporate 
governance report on pages 24 
to 38, the corporate and social 
responsibility report on pages 
20 to 23 and the Remuneration 
Committee report on pages 44 
to 57. 

The Board views maintaining high standards in its governance and management of the affairs of the Group as a fundamental 
part of discharging its stewardship responsibilities.  

Accordingly, both the Board and the Audit Committee continue to keep under review the Group’s whole system of internal 
control, which comprises not only financial controls but also operational controls, compliance and risk management.  

This process was in place throughout the 2021 financial year and accords with the Revised Guidance for Directors on Risk 
Management, Internal Control and Related Financial & Business Reporting (formerly called the Turnbull Guidance). 

26 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
CORPORATE GOVERNANCE REPORT (continued) 

How Solid State PLC has complied with the Companies Act Section 172 requirements and disclosures 

The following disclosure describes how the Directors have acted in the way they consider, in good faith, would be most 
likely  to  promote  the  success  of  the  company  for  the  benefit  of  its  members  as  a  whole,  and  in  doing  so  have  regard 
(amongst other matters) to the factors set out in section 172(1)(a) to (f). 

When performing their duties under section 172 of the Companies Act, they have considered the long-term consequences 
of decisions, matters affecting the Company’s employees and other stakeholder relationships, and the need to act fairly 
between members of the Company. 

Furthermore, they have recognised that companies are run for the benefit of their shareholders, but that the long-term 
success of a business is dependent on maintaining relationships with all significant stakeholders. The Board continuously 
reviews relationships that support the generation and preservation of value in the Company. These relationships include 
those with employees, suppliers, customers and industrial partners, and the Group’s bankers. 

Stakeholder engagement 

Stakeholder 

Engagement method 

Investors 

The key investors identified are the shareholders and lenders. The major interests in 
the Group’s shares are set out in page 36 of the corporate governance report.  

Key metrics for both the Group’s bank and shareholders are the share price, adjusted 
profit before taxation, adjusted earnings per share, cash generation and net debt. 

Through the publication of half year and full year financial reports and the Group’s 
engagement with shareholders and the bank it looks to provide insight where possible 
into the Group strategy and how the Group aims to create value for its shareholders by 
delivering strong and sustainable results that translate into earnings and cash. 

The Group seeks to promote an investor base that is interested in a long term holding 
in the company. Further disclosure of how management engage with the Group’s 
Investors is set out in the corporate governance report. 

Disclosure 
cross ref  

Pages 24 –
38 

Employees 

Employees are those individuals who are contracted to work for the company both full 
and part time. 

Pages 21 –
23 

The Group’s success is reliant on retaining the knowledgeable and skilled workforce 
who are committed to the Group and the delivery of the strategy; maintaining and 
delivering on the high standards that the Group sets for itself. 

The Group has policies and procedures in place to look after the welfare of its 
employees. The Board is proud of the “Solid State family” culture which is friendly and 
supportive of all members of the team. 

Given the nature of the business, health and safety is taken extremely seriously and 
ensuring a best practice safe working environment is essential. Employee engagement 
is promoted from the top down, encouraging employees to share ideas and to help the 
Group deliver on its goal of continuous improvement. During the COVID-19 pandemic 
employees have been engaged to ensure that they share ideas on how the Group can 
maximise the safety of the whole team which has delivered many valuable and practical 
operating practices which have been implemented across the Group. 

The knowledge and ability of the teams is a critical cornerstone of the Group’s value. 
Therefore, the Group promotes, encourages, and offers training where it is considered 
beneficial to the employee and the company. Further disclosures are provided in the 
corporate and social responsibility report. 

27 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
CORPORATE GOVERNANCE REPORT (continued) 

Disclosure 
cross ref  

Pages 21 –
23 

Stakeholder 

Engagement method 

Customers 
and 
Industrial 
Partners 

The Group uses its teams knowledge and ability to work collaboratively with customers 
and industrial partners to provide a tailored component, product, or service to meet 
their specific requirements and add value. 

The Group always aims to design, manufacture, and supply products of the highest 
quality. This differentiates the Group’s offering in terms of how the Group engages with 
its customers and the relationships it builds in providing a tailored solution. 

To meet these objectives the Group ensures that its teams have the knowledge and 
expertise to meet or exceed the expectations of its customers and industrial partners.  

During the year, the Group’s customer engagements help to focus where the Group 
invests in R&D to enable the Group to deliver relevant and continuously evolving 
technical solutions. 

Further disclosures are provided in the corporate and social responsibility report. 

Suppliers 

The Group’s extensive supply chain relationships with component manufacturers are 
critical to ensuring that the Group can meet the customers’ technical requirements for 
their specific application.  

Pages 21 –
23 

The Group’s supplier relationships and partnerships are underpinned by the technical 
knowledge that its team has of the components which the Group distributes and 
designs into its manufactured solutions. As a result, the teams relationships with the 
Group’s suppliers is a critical part of both the suppliers’ and the Group’s success. 

The Group regularly engage with the Group’s suppliers to discuss performance, price 
and how to continue to improve the Group’s supply chain relationships to deliver 
mutual benefit.  

While there are global shortages within the semiconductor electronics industry supply 
chain managing these relationships is critical, and the strength of engagement will help 
to ensure the Group manages the supply and demand in the times of shortage as 
effectively as possible. 

Key topics of engagement for the year were price and supply with the challenges that 
Brexit, COVID-19 and most significantly the global semiconductor material shortages 
are causing. Where possible the Group extended order schedules with suppliers early in 
2020 even when customers were not providing the same scheduled visibility and plans 
were made with suppliers to look to minimise any supply chain disruption. 

Further disclosures are provided in the corporate and social responsibility report. 

28 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
CORPORATE GOVERNANCE REPORT (continued) 

Principal decisions linked to our strategy and the stake holders impacted 

Principal 
decision 

Setting of 
annual 
financial 
budget and 
periodic 
updating of 
forecasts 

Basis of the decision and conclusion 

The board receives regular financial reports from the executive management, both 
historic and forward looking. The board endeavours to meet or exceed all stakeholder 
expectations where possible. Based on this the board issues appropriate stakeholder 
and market communication through relevant channels. 

Pleasingly, during the financial year ending 31 March 2021 the Board has seen 
significant commercial progress and have been able to upgrade the adjusted profit 
before tax expectations from £4.4m before guidance was withdrawn to £5.4m 
reported in this annual report. 

The annual financial budget for 2022 for the Group was approved in early March 2021, 
indicating a reasonable view that the results for the financial year would meet or 
exceed market expectation albeit there are risks associated with potential impact of 
electronics supply chain shortages.   

However, based on a solid start to the year with minimal adverse supply chain impacts 
to date the Board remained confident to continue to provide investor guidance for the 
year ahead which is reflected in the notes published by the analyst and shared on the 
Group’s website. 

Primary 
Stakeholder  

Shareholders, 
lenders, 
employees 

Changes to 
board 

The Directors seek to ensure that the composition of the board is appropriate to the 
current circumstances and has enough capacity to manage growth and succession 
planning. 

Shareholders, 
employees 

During the year Mr N F Rogers took over as Chairman on a permanent basis from Mr P 
Haining who was appointed as interim Chairman following the retirement of Mr A B 
Frere. 

Furthermore, Mr P Magowan joined the Board on the 1 January 2021 as an 
Independent Non-Executive Director and took the role of Senior Independent Director 
and Chair of the Remuneration Committee. 

Acquire 
Active Silicon 
Group 

Technology development within our manufacturing division is an integral part of 
continuing to deliver sustainable value for our stakeholders. One of the key areas 
where the Group was looking to complement its existing capabilities in Image capture, 
Image processing and custom base board design. The Board explored the risks and 
rewards of two strategic options:  

Employees, 
Customers 
and 
commercial 
partners 

a) acquire a business which had the capabilities, IP and know how the Group was 
looking to add; or,  

b) invest in our in-house engineering team to develop the capability.  

In making this decision the Board looked at various potential acquisition targets and 
evaluated a development appraisal put forward from the engineering team.  

The conclusion was that acquisition was the appropriate strategy given Active Silicon’s 
capabilities, reputation and existing customer base enabling the Group to make a step 
change with lower risk compared to developing the capability in house. 

29 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Principal 
decision 

Acquire 
Willow 
Technology 
Group 

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE REPORT (continued) 

Basis of the decision and conclusion 

Broadening the component product portfolio is a critical part of the Group’s strategy to 
build scale and resilience within the Value Added Supplies division.  

The Board has evaluated several potential acquisitions opportunities and decided not to 
proceed. However, Willow Technologies Group (WTG) provided an opportunity to take 
a significant step forward in executing on the Supplies strategy. 

WTG is a highly regarded supplier of electro-mechanical (E-mech) products both in the 
UK and internationally where the Group’s existing supplies business has very limited 
product offering.  

WTG offered an opportunity to further increase the customer base within the Value 
Added Supplies business. 

WTG has a portfolio of own brand products under the Durakool® and HermaSeal® 
ranges, with manufacturing in the USA, in addition to the established core E-mech 
product supplies business.  

This combined with its international sales channels in the USA and EU meant that this 
acquisition opportunity was clearly a good strategic fit enabling the enlarged Group to 
better service the enlarged customer base. 

Primary 
Stakeholder  

Employees, 
Customers 
and 
commercial 
partners 

Banking 
facilities 

The Group has a proactive and constructive relationship with its bankers, Lloyds Bank 
PLC.   

All 

As part of the acquisition of Active Silicon and Willow Technologies, Lloyds have agreed 
to extend the term of the Group’s £7.5m revolving credit facility to 30 November 2022 
to maintain funding flexibility. The facility is subject to financial covenants which are 
assessed 6 monthly. 

30 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Principal 
decision 

COVID-19 
management 
and risk 
mitigation 

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE REPORT (continued) 

Basis of the decision and conclusion 

The COVID-19 virus presented unprecedented challenges to all businesses during the 
year, due to the restrictions on mobility and social distancing guidance issued by the 
government to reduce the risk of the virus spreading. 

During the year the Group established COVID safe protocols across all the Group’s 
facilities and complied with government guidance and best practice. This meant the 
Group was able to continue to operate throughout the year with minimal disruption. 

The Group reported in detail the actions that were taken at the start of the Pandemic in 
the 31 March 2020 financial report.  

During the year demand stabilised and recovered from the initial drop. At the half year 
some small adjustments to the overhead base were made to align the resources with 
the stabilised demand. During the second half the Group recommenced its Capital 
investment and acquisition programmes to progress the Group’s strategy. 

As the Group enters the financial year 2021/22 and exits lockdown the Group is 
working with its staff to ensure it maintains best practice COVID safe protocols while 
establishing a “new normal” way of working. The Group is aiming to retain the best 
practices arising from COVID-19 while returning to more face to face and on site 
working where it efficient, effective, and valuable. 

Mitigation of 
component 
shortages 

As the half year approached it became clear that component supply shortages were 
going to become a global issue in the semiconductor electronics sector. The board 
evaluated the options available to try to manage and mitigate the issues wherever 
possible.  

The Board concluded that the Group was well positioned to make strategic investments 
by placing scheduled orders. In many cases these were non-cancellable, non-refundable 
orders to secure inventories. 

Given the scale of the shortages which have developed over the course of the last nine 
months this has proved to be an invaluable decision. As the shortages continue into the 
latter part of the financial year 2021/22 the risk does have the potential to adversely 
impact performance. While it does not mitigate the risk fully it has significantly reduced 
the risk in the second half of the year ended 31 March 2021 and into the first half of 
2021/22. 

The component sourcing team is currently a particularly valuable resource for the 
Group and its customers as product becomes difficult to source their expertise are 
helping to secure product for the Group’s customers albeit in some cases at premium 
prices. 

Primary 
Stakeholder  

All 

Employees, 
Customers 
and 
commercial 
partners 

31 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
CORPORATE GOVERNANCE REPORT (continued) 

The Board  

During  2020/21  the  Group  has  completed  refreshing  the  Board  to  take  the  business  through  to  the  next  phase  of  its 
development. 

Following the retirement of Mr A B Frere as Chairman on the 31 March 2020, Mr P Haining assumed the role of interim 
Chairman due to the recruitment process for the new Non-Executive Director and the appointment of a full time Chairman 
being hindered by COVID-19 distancing protocols. During 2020 The Board completed the recruitment process for a new 
Non-Executive director which resulted in Mr P Magowan joining the board on 1 January 2021 as senior independent director 
following Mr N F Rogers, stepping up to take the role of Chairman on a permanent basis on 18 November 2020. 

The Board has acknowledged that two of its Non-Executive Directors are independent in accordance with the FRC Code and 
the other is not. However the QCA guidelines acknowledge for growing companies it may not be possible for boards to 
meet the definition of “independence” for all Non-Executive Directors and sets out that it is important for the board to 
foster an attitude of independence of character and judgement, and the fact that a Director has served for more than nine 
years does not automatically affect independence, although concurrent tenure with management could hinder the ability 
to be objective. Based on the QCA guidelines the Board conclude that all the Non-Executives are independent in terms of 
character and judgement in how they execute their role as Non-Executive Directors.  

The  Board  is  mindful  of  the  threats  to  independence  and  actively  manages  the  potential  risk  to  ensure  that  the  Non-
Executives provide independent constructive challenge. The terms and conditions of appointment of the Non-Executive 
Directors are available for inspection upon request to the Company Secretary.  

Rules concerning the appointment and replacement of Directors of the Group are contained in the Articles of Association 
(“Articles”). Amendments to the Articles must be approved by a special resolution of shareholders. Under the Articles, all 
Directors are subject to election by shareholders at the first Annual General Meeting following their appointment, and to 
re-election thereafter at intervals of no more than three years. 

The Board has considered the FRC’s guidance to companies outside the FTSE 350 to consider the annual re-election of all 
Directors  and  consider  that  this  would  be  overly  burdensome  for  the  current  nature  of  the  Group.  Biographies  of  the 
Directors are set out on page 60. These show the range of business and financial experience upon which the Board is able 
to call. 

The Board’s goal is to ensure that its membership should be balanced between Executives and Non-Executives and have 
the appropriate skills and experience and knowledge of the business. The Board recognises the special position and role of 
the Chairman under the Code and has approved the formal division of responsibilities between the Chairman and Chief 
Executive Officer.  

The Chairman is responsible for the leadership of the Board and ensuring its effectiveness, and the Chief Executive Officer 
manages the Group and has the prime role, with the assistance of the Board, of developing and implementing business 
strategy. 

One of the roles of the Non-Executive Directors under the leadership of the Chairman is to undertake detailed examination 
and discussion of the strategies proposed by the Executive Directors, so as to ensure that decisions are in the best long 
term interests of shareholders and take proper account of the interests of the Group’s other stakeholders.  

The Chairman ensures that meetings of Non-Executive Directors without the Executive Directors are held. 

32 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
CORPORATE GOVERNANCE REPORT (continued) 

How the Board operates 

The  Board  meets  regularly  through  the  year  and  is  provided  with  appropriate  strategic,  operational,  and  financial 
information prior to each meeting with monthly reports to enable it to monitor the performance of the Group. 

Directors are required to devote such time and effort to their duties as is required to secure their proper discharge and, for 
Non-Executive Directors, this typically entails one or two days of meetings per month as well as reading and preparation 
time. 

At Board meetings the Chairman ensures that all Directors are able to make an effective contribution and every Director is 
encouraged to participate and provide their perspective and opinions. The Chairman always seeks to achieve unanimous 
decisions of the Board following due discussion of agenda items. 

All Directors have direct access to the advice and services of the Company Secretary who is responsible for ensuring that 
Board procedures are followed and are allowed to take independent professional advice if necessary, at the Company’s 
expense. 

The Board has a formal schedule of matters referred to it for decision. This list includes appropriate strategic, financial, 
organisational  and  compliance  issues,  including  the  approval  of  high  level  announcements,  circulars,  the  report  and 
accounts and certain strategic and management issues. 

Examples of such items include but are not limited to: 

• 
• 
• 
• 
• 
• 
• 

the approval of interim and annual results; 
the approval of the annual budget; 
approval of acquisitions or disposals; 
approval of major items of capital expenditure; 
the approval of significant contracts; 
approval of changes to corporate or capital structure; and, 
financial issues, including changes in accounting policy, the approval of dividends, bank facilities and guarantees. 

Committees of the Board 

Executive Committee 

The Executive Committee consists of the Executive Directors under the chairmanship of Mr G S Marsh and is responsible 
for the development of strategy, annual budgets and operating plans linked to the management and control of the day-to-
day operations of the Group. 

The Executive Committee is also responsible for monitoring key commercial opportunities and relationships, day to day 
stakeholder engagement and for ensuring that the Board policies are carried out on a Group-wide basis. 

Nominations Committee 

The Nominations Committee is formed when required as a sub-committee of the Board. The Nominations committee was 
formed and oversaw the recruitment process to appoint Mr P Magowan as a Non-Executive Director which was completed 
in the current financial period.  

The Nominations committee took responsibility for identifying; the skills, experience, personal qualities and capabilities 
required for the next stage in the company’s development, linked to the company’s strategy.  

The nominations committee appointed an external agency to assist with the recruitment process based on the specification 
set out to ensure that a comprehensive list of suitable candidates was identified in a “long list”. From the long list the 
committee completed the initial review  of the candidates  and first round interviews to identify a shortlist of preferred 
candidates that were interviewed by the whole Board to select the preferred candidate for the role.  

Following the appointment of Mr P Magowan the members of the Committee are: Mr G March, Mr P Magowan; Mr N 
Rogers and, Mr P Haining. 

33 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
CORPORATE GOVERNANCE REPORT (continued) 

Audit Committee 

The  Audit  Committee  consists  of  the  Non-Executive  Directors;  Mr  P  Haining,  Mr  P  Magowan  and  Mr  N  Rogers.  The 
Committee meets at least twice a year under the Chairmanship of Mr P Haining, who the Board has evaluated to have 
recent relevant financial experience.  

The  Chairman  of  the  Audit  Committee  is  not  deemed  independent  by  virtue  of  his  length  of  service  and  that  he  has 
previously  held  an  Executive  position.  However,  given  that  the  Board  considers  that  Mr  P  Haining  fulfils  the  role  with 
independence of character and judgement, the Board has concluded that it is appropriate to retain the financial experience 
and knowledge of the business possessed by Mr P Haining in his role as Chairman of the Audit Committee.  

The Audit Committee has specific written terms of reference which deal with its authority and responsibilities and these 
are available for inspection from the Company Secretary. Its duties include monitoring internal controls throughout the 
Group,  approving  the  Group’s  accounting  policies,  and  reviewing  the  Group’s  interim  results  and  full  year  financial 
statements before submission to the full Board. The Audit Committee also reviews and approves the scope and content of 
the  Group’s  annual  risk  assessment  programme  and  the  annual  audit  and  monitors  the  independence  of  the  external 
auditors. 

The Audit Committee acts to ensure that the financial performance of the Group is properly recorded and monitored, in 
fulfilling their role they meet annually with the auditors and review the reports from the auditors relating to accounts and 
internal control systems.  

The Group does not have an independent Internal Audit function, as it is not considered appropriate given the scale of the 
Group’s operations, however the Group operates internal peer reviews, with a scope of evaluating and testing the Group’s 
financial  control  procedures,  to  standardise  processes  around  best  practice.  Any  significant  issues  are  reported  to  the 
Chairman of the Audit Committee and shared with the external auditors as appropriate. 

The Group Finance Director and the external auditors attend meetings of the Audit Committee by invitation. The Committee 
also holds separate meetings with the external auditors, as appropriate.  

Remuneration Committee 

The Remuneration Committee consists of Mr P Magowan, Mr N Rogers and Mr P Haining. The Committee meets at least 
twice a year under the Chairmanship of Mr P Magowan.  

The  Chief  Executive  Officer  and  Group  Finance  Director  have  attended  some  of  the  meetings  of  the  Remuneration 
Committee  by  invitation  to  respond  to  questions  raised  by  the  Committee,  but  they  are  excluded  from  any  matter 
concerning the details of their own remuneration. 

The  Remuneration  Committee  has  specific  terms  of  reference  which  deal  with  its  authority  and  duties  and  these  are 
available for inspection from the Company Secretary. 

The purpose of the committee is to review the performance of the full time Executive Directors and to set the scale and 
structure  of  their  remuneration  and  the  basis  of  their  service  agreements  with  due  regard  to  the  interests  of  the 
shareholders. In fulfilling this responsibility, the Remuneration Committee is responsible for setting salaries, incentives and 
other benefit arrangements of Executive Directors and overseeing the Group’s employee share schemes. 

Members  of  the  Remuneration  Committee  do  not  participate  in  decisions  concerning their  own  remuneration.  Further 
details are provided in the remuneration report on pages 44 to 57. 

34 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
CORPORATE GOVERNANCE REPORT (continued) 

Attendance at meetings 

Number of meetings in 2020/21 

10 

2 

2 

5 

Board  Nominations 
Committee 

Audit 
Committee 

Remuneration 
Committee 

Attendance 

Executive 

Mr G Marsh 
Mr J Macmichael 

Mr M Richards 

Mr P James 

Non-executive 

Mr N Rogers 

Mr P Haining 

Mr P Magowan (appointed 1 Jan 2021)  

Board performance evaluation 

10 

10 

10 

10 

10 

10 

3 

2 

n/a 

n/a 

n/a 

n/a 

2 

n/a 

n/a 

n/a 

n/a 

2 

2 

2 

- 

n/a 

n/a 

n/a 

n/a 

5 

5 

2 

The Chief Executive reviews the performance of the Executive Directors on a periodic basis and reports to the Remuneration 
Committee. 

The  performance  of  the  Directors,  the  Chairman  and  of  the  Board  are  monitored  on  an  ongoing  basis.  Annually  the 
Remuneration Committee evaluates performance as part of the review of remuneration and discretionary bonus awards. 

Following the appointment of Mr N Rogers as Chairman and Mr P Magowan as Non-Executive, the Board completed an 
internal Board performance evaluation led by the newly appointed Chairman.  

The appraisal covered: composition; processes; behaviours; and activities.   

The review was open, honest with very constructive conclusions. The process identified that the development of the Board 
was  good,  with  no  major  issues,  gaps  or  critical  items  which  needed  immediate  action.  The  exercise  helped  focus  the 
opportunities  to  continue  to  develop  the  board  and  the  individuals  on  the  Board  which  will  further  add  to  the  Boards 
effectiveness going forward in developing and implementing the Group’s strategy. 

The current year has seen very positive progress against its strategy with the current trading performance ahead of the 
Board’s expectations. As a result of the pleasing performance in the current year the Executive Directors’ bonuses and 
salary increases were awarded to the Executive Board Members. Further details are provided in the remuneration report 
on pages 44 to 57. 

Shareholder relations 

The Board regards regular communications with shareholders as one of its key responsibilities. During 2020/21, the Chief 
Executive  Officer  and  Group  Finance  Director  met  with  institutional  investors  on  a  regular  basis  to  discuss  the  Group’s 
performance, the shareholder’s views, and to ensure that the strategies and objectives of the Group are well understood. 

The Chief Executive Officer keeps the Board fully informed of any significant matters discussed with shareholders and of 
shareholders’ views. In addition, the Board receives copies of the analysts’ reports which the Company is made aware of. 

The Non-Executive Directors, having considered the Code, are of the view that this approach to shareholder communication 
remains  appropriate  for  the  Group.  However,  should  shareholders  have  concerns  which  they  feel  cannot  be  resolved 
through normal shareholder meetings, the Chairman, and the Senior Independent Directors may be contacted through the 
Company Secretary. 

35 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
CORPORATE GOVERNANCE REPORT (continued) 

Shareholder relations cont’ 

Interim  and  full  year-end  shareholder  roadshows  are  held  by  the  Executive  Directors  together  with  on-line  investor 
meetings  on  the  “Investor  Meet  Company”  platform  (www.investormeetcompany.com).  Traditionally  the  Company 
arranges investor site visits typically twice a year which  will restart once the  COVID-19 restrictions allow. These events 
enable shareholders and potential shareholders to understand first-hand the business, visit the operations and meet the 
wider team.  Furthermore, shareholders attending the AGM are invited to ask the Directors questions about the business. 
Other than the Group’s routine engagement with investors on topics of strategy, governance and performance, the other 
specific matter discussed with key shareholders included changes to the board and the Director remuneration policy.   

The Company also maintains the Group’s website, which provides details of the Group’s business including its strategy, 
technologies, operations, and products. The Group website has a separate investor relations section which provides the 
Group’s news flow, share price information, and financial reports including the annual and interim reports. Hard copies of 
these financial reports are also available by request. The website can be found at: www.solidstateplc.com. 

In accordance with the recommendations of the Code, the Company will advise shareholders attending the AGM of the 
number of proxy votes lodged in respect of each resolution, analysed between ‘For’, ‘Against’, ‘at the Chairman’s discretion’ 
and ‘abstentions’. These are advised after the resolutions have been dealt with on a show of hands, providing that a poll 
has not been called for or required. 

Significant Shareholders 

Shareholders over 3%* 

Schroders 

Mrs B Marsh 

Seguro Nominees Limited 

Charles Stanley & Co 

BGF Investment Management Limited 

Canaccord Genuity Group Inc 

Mrs J Comben 

Mr G Comben 

Mr G Marsh 

% holding 

10.71% 

7.60% 

7.46% 

6.16% 

5.88% 

4.56% 

4.27% 

4.27% 

3.28% 

*Significant shareholders that the board has been notified of as at 27 April 2021 the Solid State PLC website is kept updated for notified changes during the year. 

Audit and Accountability 

The Code requires that Directors review the effectiveness of the Group’s system of internal controls on a continuing basis. 
The  scope  of  the  review  covers  all  key  controls  including  financial,  operational  and  compliance  controls  as  well  as  risk 
management. 

The  Board  has  put  in  place  a  framework  of  internal  controls  to  manage  the  risks  faced  by  the  Group  and  the  Audit 
Committee has responsibility to review, monitor and make policy recommendations to the Board upon all such matters. 

The Directors acknowledge their responsibility for the Group’s system of internal control. The Board, through the Audit 
Committee, keeps this system under continuous review and formally considers its content and its effectiveness on a bi-
annual basis. In completing their review of the effectiveness of the Group’s system of internal controls the Audit Committee 
has taken account of any material developments up to the date of the signing of the financial statements. In addition, 
recognition is given to the external audit findings, which help to inform the Committee’s views of areas of increased risk. 

36 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
CORPORATE GOVERNANCE REPORT (continued) 

Audit and Accountability – cont’ 

The system of internal control comprises those controls established to provide assurance that the assets of the Group are 
safeguarded against unauthorised use or disposal and to ensure the maintenance of proper accounting records and the 
reliability of financial information used within the business or for publication. 

Any system of internal control can only provide reasonable, but not absolute, assurance against material misstatement or 
loss, as it is designed to manage rather than to eliminate the risk of failing to achieve the business objectives of the Group. 

The Directors acknowledge their responsibility for preparing the Annual Report and Accounts. The Audit Committee reviews 
the  Group’s  reporting  processes  with  the  aim  of  ensuring  that  the  financial  reporting,  when  taken  as  a  whole,  is  fair, 
balanced, and understandable, and provides the information necessary for shareholders to assess the Company’s position 
and performance, business model and strategy. 

Risk Management 

The Board reviews and approves an Annual Budget and Business Plan prior to the start of each financial year. This includes 
reviewing the key strategic, operational, and financial objectives for the year, together with a detailed financial budget. 

The Executive Committee is accountable to the Board for delivery of the Annual Business Plan. To provide a framework for 
the delivery of the Group’s strategy and plans, the Executive Committee has developed an organisational structure with 
clear roles and responsibilities and clear lines of reporting. The Executives report performance against the plan on a monthly 
basis, which includes detailed analysis of budgetary variances and updated financial projections. 

Each  Executive  Director  is  responsible  for  identifying  and  managing  the  risks  relating  to  their  respective  areas  of 
responsibility, including the risks relating to strategy, the Annual Business Plan and day-to-day business. In addition to day-
to-day risk management the Executive Directors formally assess the major business risks and evaluate their potential impact 
on the Group. These risks and the reporting of the risk assessment is included in the strategic report on pages 11 to 15. 

Internal Control  

In respect of internal controls, the Directors are continually reviewing the effectiveness of the systems of internal controls. 
The  key  elements  of  which,  having  regard  to  the  size  of  the  Group,  are  that  the  Board  meets  regularly  and  takes  the 
decisions  on  all  material  matters.  The  organisational  structure  ensures  that  responsibilities  are  defined,  authority  only 
delegated where appropriate and that the regular management accounts are presented to the Board wherein the financial 
performance of the Group is analysed. 

Further details over the internal controls are set out in the Audit Committee report on page 39 to 43. 

The Directors acknowledge that they are responsible for the system of internal control, which is established in order to 
safeguard the assets, maintain proper accounting records and ensure that financial information used within the business 
or published is reliable. Any such system of control can, however, only provide reasonable, not absolute assurance against 
material misstatement or loss. 

Going Concern 

In assessing the going concern position of the Group for the Consolidated Financial Statements for the year ended 31 March 
2021, the Directors have considered the Group’s cash flows, liquidity and business activities. At 31 March 2021, the Group 
had cash balances of £6.9m, a drawn term revolving credit facility (RCF) of £3.75m and £3.75m of undrawn (RCF) which 
totalled £7.5m.  

The bank facilities are subject to financial covenants requiring the business to be EBITDA positive therefore this facility is 
available to fund investment in working capital, capital investment or acquisition activities. Should the business face such 
a significant downturn that it was loss making the facility would not be available to be drawn to fund additional losses 
without a covenant waiver of amendment. As a result, in evaluating a stressed model the Board have only included the RCF 
in the headroom to the extent it would be available within the covenants. 

37 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
CORPORATE GOVERNANCE REPORT (continued) 

Going Concern – Cont’ 

Based on the Group’s forecasts, the Directors have adopted the going concern basis in preparing the Financial Statements. 
The Directors have made this assessment after consideration of the Group’s cash flows and related assumptions and in 
accordance with the Guidance on Risk Management, Internal Control and Related Financial and Business Reporting 2014, 
the April 2016 guidance on Going concern basis of accounting and reporting on solvency and liquidity risks and the various 
guidance issued in 2020 all published by the UK Financial Reporting Council to provide support to Directors and board in 
making the assessment of going concern.  

Additional disclosures in respect of the Directors’ assessment and modelling to support the conclusions below are set out 
on pages 75 and 76 of the basis of preparation.  

The Directors have a reasonable expectation that the Group has adequate resources to continue in operational existence 
for  the  next  12  months,  therefore  it  is  appropriate  to  adopt  a  going  concern  basis  for the  preparation  of  the  Financial 
Statements. Accordingly, these financial statements do not include any adjustments to the carrying amount or classification 
of assets and liabilities that would result if the Group and Company were unable to continue as a going concern. 

Long term viability statement 

The Directors have assessed the viability of the Group considering the Group’s current position and the potential impact of 
the principal and emerging risks documented above that would threaten its business model, future performance, solvency, 
or liquidity. As set out in the Going Concern assessment above, the Directors have a reasonable expectation that the Group 
has adequate resources to continue in operation for the next 12 months and that the Company will be able to continue in 
operation and meet its liabilities as they fall due over the period to 30 September 2022.  

The Directors have determined that a two year period to 31 March 2023 is an appropriate period over which to assess its 
viability statement. This is based on the significant amount of change that can arise over two years in the electronic and 
optoelectronics market; the Group’s business; and, in the macro-economic environment. This has been validated by the 
impact that electronic component shortages have had on the Group’s business, the electronics industry across the World.  

The Board carried out a robust assessment of the principal risks facing the Group, including those that would threaten its 
growth drivers, future performance, solvency, or liquidity.  

As noted above the Board has also performed specific stress testing on the impact of the component shortages might have 
on future performance. The outputs from these reviews were then used to perform liquidity analysis on the strategic plan, 
the downside sensitivity reviews that were based on principal risks. 

The impact of component shortages is affecting many of the principal risks detailed above and as such is the most significant 
factor impacting near and mid-term future financial performance. Although the Company’s response to the component 
shortages is management’s key focus at this time, the Directors consider the mid and longer term opportunity in the UK 
manufacturing and Value Added Supplies businesses will remain very strong. 

The  expectation over the strength of the  market  is supported by the significant structural technological  enhancements 
(such as: Connectivity / 5G; Sensing; AI /Big data; and, Green tech), where the electronic and opto-electronic component & 
manufactured solutions the Group provides are expected to be critical elements of these enhancements. This alignment 
with the Group’s strategy and core capabilities means that the Board believe that the Group will be very well placed to take 
advantage  of  these  macro-opportunities  once  the  adverse  impact  of  the  semiconductor  component  shortages  and  the 
COVID-19 pandemic is overcome. 

G S Marsh 
Chief Executive Officer 
13 July 2021 

38 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
AUDIT COMMITTEE REPORT 

The Audit Committee is chaired by Mr P Haining FCA, a Chartered Accountant. He is considered by the Board and Audit 
Committee to have the necessary current relevant financial knowledge, qualifications, and experience for this role. 

In accordance with the QCA guidance the Board has reviewed and evaluated Mr P Haining’s performance as a Non-Executive 
Director and confirm that he remains independent in terms of both his character, his judgement and based on how he 
conducts himself as a Non-Executive Director and chair of the Audit Committee. 

Therefore,  given  the  knowledge,  experience  and  skills  of  Mr  P  Haining  the  Board  consider  that  he  remains  the  most 
appropriate member of the Board to Chair the Audit Committee. 

Primary responsibilities of the audit committee: 

•  Reviewing the effectiveness of the Group’s procedures for the identification, assessment and reporting of risk, 

financial reporting processes and internal control policies.  

•  Managing the relationship with the auditors to ensure that the external audit is effective, objective, independent 
and of a high quality. Furthermore, the Audit Committee ensures that the scope of the audit, the auditors’ terms 
of engagement, and fees are reasonable and appropriate. 
Considering whether there is a need for an internal audit function and make a recommendation to the Board as 
to  what  is  appropriate  for  the  Board  to  gain  assurance  over  the  financial  processes,  procedures,  controls  and 
reporting of the Group. 

• 

•  Reviewing significant financial reporting issues, accounting policies, and judgements and estimates adopted by 
management  and  monitoring  the  integrity  of  the  Group’s  financial  statements  independently  of  the  Executive 
Directors and external auditors. 

•  Advising the Board on whether the Committee believes the Annual Report and Accounts, taken as a whole, are 
fair, balanced and understandable and provide the information necessary for shareholders to assess the Group 
and Company’s performance, business model and strategy. 

Activities during the year: 

The Audit Committee met two times during the year. The meetings were also attended by the Group Finance Director, and 
representatives of the Group’s external auditors by invitation. 

At meetings attended by the external auditors, time is allowed for the Audit Committee to discuss issues with the external 
auditors without the Group Finance Director being present. 

As part of the Audit Committee’s review process, the Chairman of the Audit Committee and the Group Finance Director 
normally visit each of the Group’s major business units across the year to review and challenge the local management on 
their draft financial results however given the COVID-19 Pandemic this year this has been conducted through a combination 
of face-to-face meetings and remotely via MS Teams.  

The Chairman reports his observations from these reviews to the Audit Committee and the Board as part of the process for 
approving of the Annual Report and Accounts. 

The Committee operates under formal terms of reference and these are reviewed annually. An annual rolling agenda is 
used to ensure that all matters within the Audit Committee’s Terms of Reference during the year are appropriately covered. 
The  Committee  considers  that  it  has  discharged  its  responsibilities  as  set  out  in  its  terms  of  reference  to  the  extent 
appropriate during the year. 

Financial reporting 

The Audit Committee reviewed the appropriateness of the Group’s interim and full year financial statements, including 
evaluating  the  significant  financial  reporting  judgments  made  by  management  to  ensure  that  they  were  appropriate, 
considering the reports from management and ensuring that the external auditors concurred with management and the 
committee’s conclusions.  

The main areas of focus considered by the Committee during 2020/21 were as follows:  

39 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
AUDIT COMMITTEE REPORT (continued) 

The presentation of the financial statements, including the presentation of adjusted performance measures. 

Following  review  of  reports  from  management  the  Committee  concurred  that  the  presentation  of  the  adjusted 
performance measures is appropriate, balanced and enables the users of the accounts to understand the underlying and 
on-going performance of the business. 

Going concern 

The Committee assessed the appropriateness of the going concern assumption. In doing this the committee reviewed the 
resources  available  to  the  Group,  taking  account  of  the  Group’s trading  and  cash  flow  forecast  together  with  available 
funding headroom in these very uncertain trading times because of the impact of component shortages and COVID-19. 
Based on this as disclosed on pages 37, 38, 75 and 76 in the basis of preparation the committee concluded that the Going 
Concern principle was appropriate. In finalising the accounts, the committee noted that the external auditors accepted 
management and the committee’s conclusions. 

Review for the potential impairment of goodwill and other intangible assets.  

The  Committee  reviewed  and  challenged  the  key  assumptions,  judgements,  and  sensitivities  in  the  report  from 
management. The Committee concurred that the expected future cash flows of the Group support the carrying value of 
goodwill and other intangible assets, and that there were no triggering events which suggested any potential impairment 
of goodwill and other intangible assets. 

Review of Acquisition accounting. 

Following review of reports from management and discussion with the CFO, which set out the basis of recognition of the 
fair  value  of  acquisition  intangibles  and  the  assessment  of  the  fair  value  of  deferred  contingent  consideration  the 
Committee concurred that the judgements within the acquisition accounting, and that the treatment was in accordance 
with IFRS3. 

Accounting for R&D tax credits. 

Following review of reports from management and correspondence with the companies’ R&D tax advisors, setting out the 
level of the R&D claim, the level of the R&D tax credit which is deferred and amortised to match to capitalised development 
programmes, the Committee concurred that the R&D tax credit accounting was appropriate. 

Review of judgemental areas, and specifically the level of accounting provisions.  

Following review of reports from management the two areas of more significant judgment are provisions for credit defaults 
based  on  the  expected  loss  rate  in  accordance  with  IFRS  9,  and  provisions  for  obsolete  inventories.  The  Committee 
concurred that the provisioning policy had been applied consistently and the level of provisions remains appropriate. 

Annual report 

At  the  request  of  the  Board  the  Committee  considered  whether  the  2020/21  annual  report  was  fair,  balanced,  and 
understandable  and  whether  it  provided  the  relevant  information  for  stakeholders  to assess  the  Group’s  performance, 
business model and strategy. 

Having taken account of the other information provided to the Board throughout the year, the Committee was satisfied 
that, taken as a whole, the annual report was fair, balanced, and understandable. 

The Committee was satisfied that based on its review, challenge and debate of the draft financial statements and the key 
accounting  items,  that  the  assumptions  made,  the  judgements  applied,  and  the  accounting  and  disclosures  were 
appropriate. 

The Committee reviewed and recommended the approval of the narrative reporting statements on corporate governance, 
internal control and risk management in the annual report and the half year and trading statements. 

40 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
AUDIT COMMITTEE REPORT (continued) 

External auditors 

The Audit Committee has developed a formal Auditor Independence Policy. In accordance with this policy, the Committee 
oversees the relationship with the external auditors and monitors all services provided by them and all fees payable to 
them.  This  is  to  ensure  that  potential  conflicts  of  interest  are  considered,  and  that  an  independent,  objective  and 
professional relationship is maintained. 

Following the completion of last year’s audit by RSM UK Audit LLP a comprehensive debrief was completed to ensure that 
the value from the audit was maximised for all stakeholders. The output of the debrief formed part of the audit planning 
and scoping process to ensure continuous improvement. 

The  Audit  Committee  also  monitors  the  effectiveness  of  the  annual  audit.  In  advance  of  the  financial  year  end,  the 
Committee receives a detailed audit plan from the auditors which identifies the auditors’ assessment of the key risks and 
their intended areas of focus. This is agreed with the Committee to ensure that the scope and coverage of audit work is 
appropriate. 

Based on the scope of work the committee ensure that the proposed fees are fair and reasonable and represent value for 
the services provided. 

As in prior years the provision of external audit and tax compliance are separated where practical. As such tax advice is 
provided by Bevan Buckland LLP and The Kings Mill Practice.  

In  addition,  Solid  State  PLC’s  management  also  provide  the  Committee  with  feedback  on  their  view  of  the  quality  and 
effectiveness of the audit. This feedback is considered in conjunction with the Committee’s own review of the auditor’s 
performance in delivering an effective, objective, independent and a high-quality audit. 

Based on the prior year audit and the review completed of this year’s services delivered in respect of the 2020/21 audit of 
Solid  State  PLC  both  management  and  the  audit  committee  were  satisfied  that  there  had  been  appropriate  focus  and 
challenge on the primary areas of audit risk and they assessed the quality of the audit process as good. 

Non-audit services 

The Committee also regularly reviews the nature, extent, objectivity, and cost of non-audit services provided by the external 
auditors.  

Under this policy, the award to the Group’s auditors of audit related services, tax consulting services or other non-audit 
related services in excess of £10,000 must first be approved by the Audit Committee. The policy also sets out guidelines for 
the recruitment of employees or former employees of the external auditor.  

During  the  year,  the  audit  committee  approved  non-audit  services  in  respect  of  due  diligence  services.  The  committee 
reviewed the potential threats to independence and the associated safeguards and concluded that independence would 
be maintained. 

In addition, the Group’s auditors are required to make a formal report to the Audit Committee annually on the safeguards 
that are in place to maintain their independence and the internal safeguards in place to ensure their objectivity. 

41 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
AUDIT COMMITTEE REPORT (continued) 

Non-audit services 

The nature of the services provided by the auditors and the amounts paid to them are as detailed below: 

RSM UK audit LLP (Group auditors) 

Fees payable to company’s auditors for the audit of the parent company 
accounts and consolidated financial statements 
Fees payable to company’s auditor and its associates for other services: 

Taxation services 

•  Other assurance services 
• 
• 
•  Other non-audit services 

Services relating to corporate finance transactions 

Total fees payable to the Group auditors 

31 March 21 
£’000 

31 March 20 
£’000 

123 

- 

- 
48 
3 

75 

1 

- 

9 

18 

_______ 

174 
_______ 

_______ 

103 
_______ 

The audit scope for the year ended 31 March 2021 relates to the audit of the Consolidated Group Accounts and that of the 
parent company. In addition to the Dormant non trading companies several the UK trading subsidiaries have adopted the 
exemption from the requirements to file audited financial statements by virtue of section 479A of the Companies Act 2006. 
In adopting the exemption Solid State PLC has provided a statutory guarantee to these subsidiaries in accordance with 
section 479C of the Companies Act 2006. (see note 14) 

Internal Audit 

The Board asks the Audit Committee to review annually the requirement for an internal audit function, having regard to 
the size of the Group, the costs of such a function versus the likely benefit and the sufficiency of the assurance to validate 
the functioning of the system of internal control, given the operational and financial circumstances facing the Group. 

Based on the review of the management reporting and external audit assurances over controls and financial reporting, the 
Audit committee considers there was no requirement for an internal audit function at this time. 

As  part  of  the  Group  Financial  Director’s  review  processes  the  divisional  Managing  Directors  and  the  site  Financial 
Controllers are obliged to positively confirm, that the agreed procedures are in place and are being adhered to, with specific 
reference to key controls such as bank and control account reconciliations. 

It  has  been  reviewed  by  the  Committee  and  they  remain  satisfied  with  the  arrangements.  No  significant  failings  or 
weaknesses were identified by the internal management review and sign off process, but several minor improvements were 
identified and implemented. It has been identified that the capacity within financial resources needs to be reviewed post 
acquisitions. 

The Committee also considers the discharge of the Board’s responsibilities in the areas of corporate governance, financial 
reporting, and internal control, including the internal management of risk, as identified in the FRC’s revised guidance on 
Guidance on Risk Management, Internal Control and Related Financial and Business Reporting. 

Risk management activities are dealt with in more detail in the Strategic Report on pages 11 to 15. 

42 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
AUDIT COMMITTEE REPORT (continued) 

Internal control 

The Audit Committee reviews the effectiveness of the Group’s system of internal controls and risk management activities 
bi-annually as part of the half year end and full year public reporting. 

The  key  procedures  that  the  Directors  have  established  with  a  view  to  providing  effective  internal  control  include  the 
following: 

a clearly defined organisational structure and delegated limits of authority; 

• 
•  Group policies and procedures in respect of financial reporting and control, contract approval, project appraisal, 
human  resources,  quality  control,  health  and  safety,  information  security  and  corporate  governance  and 
compliance; 
the preparation of annual budgets and regular forecasts which are approved by the Board; 
the monitoring of performance against budget and forecasts and the reporting of any variances in a timely manner 
to the Board; 
regular review and self-assessment of the risks to which the Group is exposed, taking steps to monitor and mitigate 
these wherever possible; 

• 
• 

• 

•  where appropriate, taking out insurance cover; and, 
• 

approval by the Audit Committee of audit plans and, on behalf of the Board, receipt of reports on the Group’s 
accounting  and  financial  reporting  practices  and  its  internal  controls  together  with  reports  from  the  external 
auditors as part of their normal audit work. 

P Haining FCA  
Audit Committee Chairman 
13 July 2021 

43 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
REMUNERATION COMMITTEE REPORT 

On behalf of the Board, it is my pleasure to present our Directors’ Remuneration Report (the “Report”) for the year ended 
31 March 2021. I succeeded Mr N Rogers as Chair of the Remuneration Committee in January 2021 when I joined the Board. 
As  we  announced  previously  Nigel  took  over  the  role  of  Chairman  of  the  Board  and  therefore  relinquished  the  role  of 
Chairman of the Remuneration Committee.  

The approach that we have adopted in reviewing the Company’s remuneration policy for Executive Directors is to motivate, 
retain and, when necessary, attract executive management of the right calibre.  

To  do  this,  we  provide  packages  which  reflect  individual  experience  and  performance  and  take  into  account  the 
remuneration paid by companies of a similar size and complexity to Solid State PLC. 

In this report I have set out the policy incorporating some minor updates from the previous policy, in order to continue 
towards  adopting  best  practice,  to  improve  the  competitiveness  of  remuneration  packages  and  to  further  enhance 
stakeholder alignment. 

In determining the remuneration packages for the Executive Directors for the forthcoming financial year, the Committee 
took into account the following factors: 

• 

• 
• 
• 

The Group’s overall performance and strategy - in particular, the Committee noted the strong organic growth in 
profitability, value enhancing acquisitions, and record trading of Solid-State PLC for the year ended 31 March 2021; 
Current and emerging market practice; 
Best practice expectations of institutional investors; and 
The competitiveness of the Company’s remuneration – the Committee looked both at other companies in the AIM 
and SmallCap index as well as a set of comparators that have similar complexities to Solid State PLC. 

The Committee’s conclusion was that the current structure was appropriate however it did need to be refined to ensure 
that it remained fit for purpose going forward. The refinements ensure it remains simple and consistent, with pay outcomes 
dependent upon performance linked to our business strategy.  

All decisions made by the Committee have been made under the Group Remuneration Policy. 

Basic salary increases for the forthcoming year have been determined by reference to a peer Group of UK listed technology 
companies, an understanding of the general rate of salary inflation and a desire to ensure a competitive level of pay. 

Accordingly, increases have been determined as follows: 

• 
• 
• 

Group Chief Executive  
Group Chief Financial Officer  
Divisional Managing Directors  

–   8.1% 
– 13.8% 
–   3.1% 

In addition to basic pay, the Committee determined that an annual bonus pool should be set aside based upon a reasonable 
share of the excess of any profits earned over the market expectation at the beginning of each year. This will be set such 
that: 

• 
• 
• 

no bonus accrues until the company meets or exceeds expectation (after bonus cost); 
the cost of the scheme would not normally exceed one third of the excess profits; and, 
aggregate  allocations  from  the  pool  (set  at  the  discretion of  the  Committee  at  the  end  of  each  year)  would  not 
normally exceed 60% of aggregate basic salaries. 

44 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
REMUNERATION COMMITTEE REPORT (continued) 

Business performance and resulting remuneration outcomes for the year ending 31 March 2021 

It has been a record year for the Company and for Shareholders. Solid State PLC has continued to deliver strong results for 
Shareholders: trading for the year ended 31 March 2021 was strong across both divisions and the Group has delivered full-
year earnings which are 23% ahead of the market expectations from the beginning of the year. 

There were several achievements which we expect to build value over the longer term. You can read more detail in the 
Strategic Report on pages 6 to 19 but some of the highlights are summarised below: 

• 
• 
• 
• 
• 

Resilient performance against unprecedented macro-economic backdrop  
Further good progress on key strategic and performance targets 
Completion of two important strategic acquisitions and good progress in integrating those businesses into the Group 
Strong growth orders, profits, and earnings (Adj diluted EPS 2 year CAGR of 23.4%) 
Earnings and cash generation supporting significant increase in dividend to 16p (2 year CAGR of 13.1%) 

Considering  this  performance,  the  Committee  decided  to  allocate  a  discretionary  annual  bonus  pool  for  the  Executive 
Directors which in total was equivalent to 60% of the Executive Group’s total basic salary. Subsequent payments to each 
director were then allocated on an individual basis.  The level of bonus is towards the top of the long term limits set under 
the new scheme.  This reflects the view of the Committee that the current year performance has indeed been exceptionally 
strong in challenging times. While there was no LTIP in place to vest for the financial years 2021 and 2022, the Remuneration 
Committee put in place a LTIP in the prior year with the first grant being made during the financial year. Further details of 
bonus and LTIP awards can be found on page 57 of this report.  

Share Option incentives 

The Committee also recognise the benefits of implementing a long-term reward for the executive through an LTIP. This is 
intended to encourage retention and motivation of executive Directors and other key members of the management team 
through building an equity investment in the company aligned to the generation of long term shareholder value. 

During the year the new share option plans; a HMRC approved Company Share Option Plan (“CSOP”) and an unapproved 
Long  Term  Incentive  Plan  (“LTIP”)  offering  opportunities  to  build  meaningful  equity  stakes  in  the  Company  for 
approximately 12 – 15 key employees, including the executive Directors, were implemented. The first award made to the 
senior  leadership  team  following  the  ratification  at  the  AGM.  These  plans  operate  in  manner  consistent  with  relevant 
Investment Association’s guidelines, including, for example, a limit to dilution as a consequence of aggregate awards of 
10% over a ten-year period. Awards under these plans are typically expected to be made annually following the AGM as 
the first award was this year.  

45 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
REMUNERATION COMMITTEE REPORT (continued) 

Other key activities in the year ending 31 March 2021 

During the year under review, the Committee held five formal meetings. As well as the implementation of the remuneration 
policy, the Committee also carried out the following activities: 

• 

• 
• 
• 
• 
• 
• 
• 
• 

Reviewed and approved the Executive Directors’ performance against financial and non-financial objectives for the 
year ended 31 March 2021 and determined the bonuses payable; 
Determined salary increases for Executive Directors for the year ending 31 March 2022; 
Approved the LTIP Awards to be made in the year ending 31 March 2022 and their performance conditions; 
Reviewed and approved the annual bonus structure for Executive Directors for the year ending 31 March 2021; 
Reviewed and approved the change of company cars to hybrid or electric cars; 
Awarded the first grant of 36,750 shares under the HMRC approved CSOP plan to senior staff; 
Awarded the first grant of 42,800 shares under the new LTIP plan to the executives; 
Implemented a deferred bonus scheme, in line with the Company’ remuneration policy; and 
Updated the terms of reference of the Committee. 

Further  detail  on  the  above can  be  found  in  the  Annual Report  on  Remuneration.  During  2021/22,  the  Committee  will 
continue to review the reward arrangements appropriate to Executive Directors. 

The Annual Report on Remuneration explains how our policy has been updated and implemented during the year and, 
along with this letter, will be subject to an advisory vote at our AGM (resolution 2). We hope that you will support this 
resolution. 

P Magowan 
Remuneration Committee Chairman 
13 July 2021 

46 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
REMUNERATION COMMITTEE REPORT (continued) 

Single page remuneration summary 

Corporate performance for the year 

Remuneration principles 

The key principles of our approach to executive remuneration are to attract, retain and motive high calibre executives with 
the  skills,  experience,  and  vision  to  deliver  outstanding  company  performance,  while  recognising  the  need  to  be  cost 
effective. The aim is to incentivise the executives to deliver against the Solid State PLC business plans and budgets as part 
of progressing the longer term strategy of sustainable growth of the business by aligning executive remuneration to the 
Solid State PLC strategic goals and objectives which underpin delivering value for all stakeholders. 

Executive Director Total Remuneration 

47 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
    
            
 
 
    
            
 
    
                
 
 
    
                
 
REMUNERATION COMMITTEE REPORT (continued) 

Remuneration report 

This  report  is  prepared  to  address  the  reporting  requirements  of  the  QCA  code  which  the  company  has  adopted  in 
accordance with AIM rule 26. 

Remuneration Committee 

The  Company’s  remuneration  policy  is  the  responsibility  of  the  Remuneration  Committee  (the  ‘Rem  Co’),  which  was 
established in 2017.The terms of reference of the Rem Co are outlined on the Group website:www.solidstateplc.com.  

The members of the Committee are: Mr P Magowan (Chairman); Mr N Rogers and, Mr P Haining. 

The Rem Co, which is required to meet at least twice a year, met 5 times during the year ended 31 March 2021. The Chief 
Executive  Officer  and  certain  executives  may  be  invited  to  attend  meetings  of  the  Committee  to  assist  it  with  its 
deliberations, but no executive is present when his or her own remuneration is discussed. 

Refreshed remuneration policy 

In reviewing the remuneration policy, the committee has refreshed the policy as set out below.  

Opportunity 

Performance metrics 

N/A 

Any percentage 
increases will 
ordinarily be in line 
with those across the 
wider workforce. 

However, salary 
increases may be 
higher in exceptional 
circumstances, such 
as the need to retain 
a critical executive, or 
an increase in the 
scope of the 
executive’s role 
(including promotion 
to a more senior role) 
and/or in the size of 
the Group. 

Insurance cover 
based on market 
rates. 

N/A 

N/A 

Up to 4% of base 
salary in addition to 
an employee 
contribution of 5%. 

Remuneration  element  and 
link to strategy 

Operation  

Base Salary – To attract and 
retain quality executives 
which provides a competitive 
total package 

Salaries are reviewed annually 
and normally fixed for 12 
months, effective from 1 April. 

The Committee considers: 

Benefits 

To help retain employees and 
remain competitive in the 
marketplace. 

Pension 

To facilitate long-term 
savings provisions. 

Role, competence and 
performance; 
Average change in broader 
workforce pay; and,  
Group salary budgets. 
Salaries will be benchmarked 
against companies of a 
comparable size and complexity 
which operate, in similar sectors. 

Directors, along with other senior 
UK executives, receive an electric 
or hybrid company car or car 
allowance, life assurance, and 
family medical insurance. (note 
BIK are expected to drop as 
executives transition to electric 
or hybrid vehicles which attract 
lower BIK.)  

The Company operates a defined 
contribution pension scheme. 
Contributions are benchmarked 
periodically against companies of 
a comparable size and complexity 
which operate in similar sectors. 

Executive Directors may take a 
cash allowance in lieu of pension 
contributions. 

48 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
REMUNERATION COMMITTEE REPORT (continued) 

Remuneration  element  and 
link to strategy 

Operation  

Opportunity 

Performance metrics 

Annual bonus 

The principal long-term 
measure of Shareholder 
interests is Total Shareholder 
Return. 

The Committee considers 
that this will be enhanced 
through the setting and 
attainment of various short-
term targets, which are 
within the control of the 
Executive Directors.  

These are incentivised 
through the bonus plan 
which rewards the 
achievement of annual 
financial and strategic 
business targets. 

Up to 100% of salary 
payable for 
significant over-
achievement of 
financial and non-
financial bonus 
objectives. 

The bonus will pay 
0% at minimum 
threshold, and 60% 
at excepted 
maximum.  In 
exceptional 
circumstances, the 
Committee has 
discretion to declare 
additional bonus up 
to a maximum of 
100%. 

Targets (financial and non-
financial) are determined and 
reviewed by the Committee 
annually and are selected to be 
relevant for the year in question. 

Actual bonus payable is 
determined by the Committee 
after the financial year-end, based 
on performance against these 
targets. 

Financial objectives are updated to 
reflect acquisitions, disposals and 
currency movements during the 
year. 

Bonus payments are delivered in 
cash or shares. Clawback (of any 
bonus paid) may be applied during 
employment or for 1 year post-
termination in the event of gross 
misconduct, material financial 
misstatement, error in calculation 
of outcomes or in any other 
circumstance that the 
Remuneration Committee 
considers appropriate. 

Performance is assessed on an 
annual basis against financial and 
personal / strategic objectives set at 
the start of each year.  

Financial measures will be weighted 
appropriately each year according to 
business priorities, and will represent 
no less than 70% of the annual 
bonus.   

Performance vs. targeted levels will 
be measured at budgeted FX rates.  

Financial measures may include (but 
are not limited to) PBT and Adj FD 
EPS. Non-financial measures may 
include strategic measures directly 
linked to the Company’s priorities. 

Personal/strategic objectives will 
represent no more than 30% of the 
bonus and will be set annually to 
capture expected individual 
contributions to Solid State PLCs 
strategic plan.   

The personal element shall not pay 
out unless financial performance is at 
least at Threshold.  

The Remuneration Committee has 
discretion to adjust formulaic bonus 
outcomes to ensure fairness for 
shareholders and participants, to 
ensure pay aligns underlying 
company performance, and to avoid 
unintended outcomes.   

These adjustments can be either 
upwards (within plan limits) or 
downwards (including down to zero).  

The Remuneration Committee may 
consider measures outside of the 
bonus framework to ensure there is 
no reward for failure. 

49 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
REMUNERATION COMMITTEE REPORT (continued) 

Remuneration 
element and link to 
strategy 

Company Share 
Option Plan (CSOP) 

To motivate senior 
staff and executives 
to deliver shareholder 
value over the longer 
term. 

Long Term Incentive 
Plan 

To motivate 
executives to deliver 
shareholder value 
over the longer term. 

Operation  

Opportunity 

Performance metrics 

Awards of up to the 
applicable HMRC 
approved limits 

Performance metrics reflect strategic goals 
and milestones. 

The exercise of the award is dependent 
upon the individual’s continued 
employment for a three-year period from 
the date of grant, subject to the good and 
bad leaver provisions within the Plan rules 
and the satisfaction by the Company of 
certain performance conditions over the 
three-year vesting period. 

The performance conditions are based on 
Group financial performance, which may 
include (but not be limited to) Group 
earnings or returns over the performance 
period. 

The Company’s share schemes are funded 
through a combination of shares purchased 
in the market and newly issued shares, as 
appropriate. 

Up to 125% of 
salary. 

Performance metrics reflect strategic goals 
and milestones. 

The exercise of the award is dependent 
upon the individual’s continued 
employment for a three-year period from 
the date of grant, subject to the good and 
bad leaver provisions within the Plan rules 
and the satisfaction by the Company of 
certain performance conditions over the 
three-year vesting period. 

The performance conditions are based on 
Group financial performance, which may 
include (but not be limited to) Group 
earnings or returns over the performance 
period. 

The Company’s share schemes are funded 
through a combination of shares purchased 
in the market and newly issued shares, as 
appropriate. 

Awards of conditional shares 
through market price options are 
typically granted annually, with 
vesting dependent on the 
achievement of performance 
conditions over the following three 
years. 

Dividend equivalents will be paid 
on vested awards. 

These awards will be made under 
an HMRC approved company share 
option plan (CSOP) to Senior staff 
and Executive Directors, 

Malus and clawback applies to 
vested and unvested CSOP awards 
in the event of material 
misstatement of information or 
misconduct. 

The Company monitors the 
number of shares issued under the 
schemes and their impact on 
dilution limits. 

The Company is committed to 
remaining within the Investment 
Association’s 10% dilution limit. 

Awards of conditional shares 
through nil-cost options are 
typically granted annually, with 
vesting dependent on the 
achievement of performance 
conditions over the following three 
years. 

Vested awards are subject to a 
two-year holding period, in 
aggregate a five-year period from 
award to exercise. 

Dividend equivalents will be paid 
on vested awards. 

These awards will be made under 
an unapproved share option plan 
(USOP) to Executive Directors, 

Malus and clawback applies to 
vested and unvested LTIP awards in 
the event of material misstatement 
of information or misconduct. 

The Company monitors the 
number of shares issued under the 
schemes and their impact on 
dilution limits. 

The Company is committed to 
remaining within the Investment 
Association’s 10% dilution limit. 

50 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
REMUNERATION COMMITTEE REPORT (continued) 

Details of the policy on fees paid to the Company’s Non-Executive Directors are set out in the table below: 

Remuneration  element  and  link  to 
strategy 

Operation  

Opportunity 

Fees to attract and retain Non-
Executive Directors of the highest 
calibre with broad commercial and 
other experience relevant to the 
Company. 

The fees paid to the Non 
Executive Directors are 
determined by the Board 
(excluding the Non-Executive 
Directors or group of Non 
Executive Directors whose 
remuneration is being discussed).  

Fee levels are benchmarked 
against similar roles at 
comparable companies.  Time 
commitment and responsibility 
are considered when reviewing 
fee levels. 

Fee levels are reviewed annually, with 
any adjustments effective 1 April in the 
year following review. It is expected 
that increases to Non-Executive 
Director fee levels will normally be in 
line with salaried employees over the 
life of this policy.  However, in the 
event that there is a material 
misalignment with market, or a 
material change in the time 
commitment required to fulfil a Non-
Executive Director role, the Board has 
the power to make an appropriate 
adjustment to the fee level. 

Performance 
metrics 

N/A 

Notes to the remuneration policy and performance conditions and target setting 

Each year, the Committee will determine the weightings, performance metrics and targets as well as timing of grants and 
payments for the annual bonus, CSOP and LTIP plans within the approved remuneration policy and relevant plan rules.  

The Committee evaluates a number of factors which assist in reaching their conclusions and view. These include, but are 
not limited to, the strategic priorities for the Company over the mid/long term, Shareholder feedback, the risk profile of 
the business and the macroeconomic climate. 

The  Annual  Bonus  Scheme  is  measured  against  a  balance  of  profitability,  and  the  delivery  of  key  strategic  areas  of 
importance for the business. The profitability metrics used include adjusted profit before tax and /or adjusted fully diluted 
EPS. 

The  CSOP  and  LTIP  are  assessed  against  a  performance  measure  identified  as  the  most  relevant  to  driving  sustainable 
bottom line business performance, as well as providing value for Shareholders. This measure is currently considered to be 
real growth in adjusted fully diluted EPS. 

Targets are set against the annual and long-term plans, taking into account analysts’ forecasts, the Company’s strategic 
plans, prior year performance, estimated vesting levels and the affordability of pay arrangements. Targets are set to provide 
an appropriate balance of risk and reward to ensure that, while being motivational for participants, maximum payments 
are only made for exceptional performance. 

In exceptional circumstances, the Committee has the discretion to adjust and/or set different targets and performance 
conditions for annual bonus and long term incentive plans, provided the new conditions are no tougher or easier than the 
original conditions. This includes events where conditions are unable to fulfil their original intended purpose. Awards may 
also be adjusted in certain circumstances (e.g. for a rights issue, a corporate restructuring or for special dividends). 

Any  discretion  exercised  by  the  Committee  in  the  adjustment  of  performance  conditions  will  be  fully  explained  to 
Shareholders  in  the  relevant  report.  If  the  discretion  is  material  and  upwards,  the  Committee  will  consult  with  major 
Shareholders in advance. No such discretion was exercised during FY20/21. 

The Committee also has the ability to grant additional LTIP awards to participants in return for their bearing the Company’s 
liability to employer’s National Insurance arising on the exercise of such grants made to them above. The additional award 
ensures that the participants are in a neutral position on an after-tax basis, assuming no change in tax rates. 

All  historical  awards  that  have  been  granted  before  the  date  this  policy  came  into  effect  and  still  remain  outstanding 
(including those detailed on page 57 of this report) remain eligible to vest based on their original award terms. 

51 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
REMUNERATION COMMITTEE REPORT (continued) 

Recruitment (and appointment) policy 

The  remuneration  package  for  a  new  Executive  Director  would  be  set  in  accordance  with  the  terms  of  the  Company’s 
approved remuneration policy in force at the time of appointment. The same approach would be adopted where a Director 
is promoted to the Board from within the Group. 

Element 

Base salary 

Pension  

Benefits 

Annual Bonus 

Recruitment Policy 

The base salaries of new appointees will be determined by reference to relevant market data, experience 
and skills of the individual, internal relativities, and current basic salary.  Where new appointees have 
initial basic salaries set below market, any shortfall may be managed with phased increases over multiple 
years subject to the individual’s development in the role. 

New appointees will receive pension contributions or an equivalent cash supplement in line with existing 
policy. 

New  appointees  will  be  eligible  to  receive  benefits  which  may  include  (but  are  not  limited  to)  those 
outlined in the policy table.   

The structure  described in the policy table will apply to new appointees with the relevant maximum 
being pro-rated to reflect the proportion of employment over the year. Targets for the personal element 
will be tailored to each executive. 

LTIP 

New  appointees  will  be  granted  awards  under  the  LTIP  on  the  same  terms  as  other  executives,  as 
described in the policy table. 

In addition, a new recruit may be awarded up to 125% of salary in performance shares, which would be 
subject to the same performance measures and rules in force for the LTIPs at the time of appointment. 

Compensation for 
forfeited remuneration 

The approach in respect of compensation for forfeited remuneration in respect of a previous employer 
will be considered on a case-by-case basis taking into account all relevant factors, such as performance 
achieved or likely to be achieved, the proportion of the performance period remaining and the form of 
the award. 

The Committee retains the ability to make use of the relevant guidance to facilitate the “buyout”. Any 
“buy-out” awards would have a fair value no higher than the remuneration forfeited. 

Notice period and payment for loss of office 

It is the Company’s policy that Executive Directors should have service contracts incorporating a notice period of one year. 
However, it may be necessary occasionally to offer shorter or longer initial notice periods to new Directors. 

Under  the  terms  of  their  service  contracts,  any  termination  payments  are  not  pre-determined  but  are  determined  in 
accordance with the Director’s contractual rights, taking account of the circumstances and the Director’s duty to mitigate 
loss. The Company’s objective is to manage its exposure to the risk of a potential termination payment. 

Non-Executive Directors have letters of appointment for a term of one year whereupon they are normally renewed, but 
generally for no more than nine years in aggregate. Non-Executive Directors are not eligible for payment on termination, 
other than payment to the end of their contracts. 

52 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
REMUNERATION COMMITTEE REPORT (continued) 

Service contracts and letters of appointment 

The Executive Directors have entered into service agreements which can be terminated by either party by providing the 
required notice period set out in their respective service contracts. 

The Chairman and Non-Executive Directors have entered into letters of appointment for an initial fixed period up to the 
first AGM where in accordance with the Article of Association they are re-elected by the shareholders. Subsequently in 
accordance with the Article of Association all Directors are required to stand for re-election by rotation at the AGM on a 
three year cycle. The appointment can be terminated on six months’ notice by either party. 

N Rogers 
G S Marsh 
P O James  
M T Richards 
J L Macmichael  
P Haining 
P Magowan 

Non-Executive Chairman 
Group Chief Executive 
Group Finance Director 
Manufacturing MD 
Value Added Supplies MD 
Non-Executive Director  
Non-Executive Director 

External appointments 

Date of contract / letter 
of appointment 
19/06/2019 
19/06/1996 
18/11/2016 
06/04/2016 
26/05/2010 
31/10/2017 
17/11/2020 

Expiry of current term 

September 2022 
12 months by either party 
12 months by either party 
12 months by either party 
12 months by either party 
September 2022 
6 months by either party 

With the approval of the Board in each case, and subject to the overriding requirements of the Group, Executive Directors 
may accept external appointments as Non-Executive Directors of other companies and retain any fees received.   

During the year ended 31 March 2021, the Executive Directors did not hold any Non-Executive Directorships with other 
companies other than Mr P O James who on a voluntary basis is a Non-Executive Director for the British Waterski Federation 
Limited and is a Director of Bradley Drive Management Company Ltd. 

LTIP and Bonus leaver provisions 

Reason for leaving 
Annual bonus 
Resignation  
Good leaver / Change of control 

LTIP 
Resignation  

Good leaver / Change of control 

Calculation of vesting / payment 

No annual bonus payable 
Cash bonuses will typically be paid to the extent that performance objectives have been 
met.  Any resulting bonus will typically be prorated for time worked.  The Remuneration 
Committee retains discretion to vary this treatment in individual circumstances. 

Outstanding awards would normally lapse however the committee has the discretion to 
approve vesting based on a pro-rata time apportionment and assessment of achievement 
of performance conditions. 
The Committee determines whether and to what extent outstanding awards vest based 
on the extent to which performance conditions have been achieved. The Remuneration 
Committee retains discretion to vary this treatment in individual circumstances.  

The determination of vesting will be made as soon as reasonably practical following the 
end of the performance period or such earlier date as the Remuneration Committee may 
agree (within 12 months in the event of death). 

In the event of change of control, the following 3 years’ awards will vest on a pro-rata 
time  apportionment  and  assessment  of  achievement  of  performance  conditions  as  a 
minimum.  Any award above this level will be at the committee’s discretion. For the initial 
awards under the LTIP there are transitional provisions applicable. 

In  the  event  of  a  change  of  control,  awards  may  alternatively  be  exchanged  for  new 
equivalent awards in the acquirer by mutual agreement where appropriate. 

A Good leaver is defined as a participant ceasing to be employed by the Group by reason of death, disability, ill health, 
retirement, or any other reason that the Committee determines in its absolute discretion. 

53 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
REMUNERATION COMMITTEE REPORT (continued) 

Consideration of employment conditions elsewhere in the Group 

The  remuneration  policy,  which  has  been  implemented  for  the  current  Executive  Directors,  is  more  weighted  towards 
performance-related pay than for other employees. The reason for this is to establish a clear link between remuneration 
received by the Executive Directors and the creation of Shareholder value. 

As mentioned on page 48 of this Annual Report and Accounts, when setting the policy, the Committee takes account of pay 
and employment conditions elsewhere in the Group but has not used any remuneration comparison measures between 
the Executive Directors and other employees. 

Consideration of Shareholder views 

The Committee’s policy is to receive updates on the views of Shareholders and their representative bodies on best practice 
and take these into account. It seeks the views of key Shareholders on matters of remuneration in which it believes they 
would be interested. 

Adoption of the refined policy for 2021/22 

In  addition  to  reviewing  and  refining  the  policy  to  adopt  last  year  to  move  towards  best  practice,  the  committee  has 
reviewed the Executive remuneration for the coming year. The results of this review have been set out in this report. 

(i) Executive remuneration 
The previous full salary and benefit review took effect from 1 April 2020, as a result it was appropriate to complete an 
annual review of salaries and performance bonuses should be completed ahead of the end of financial year ended 31 March 
2021. This review has taken into account the refreshed Policy, the Group performance, individual performance and internal 
relativities in addition to independently reviewing remuneration against appropriate benchmarking. 

The impact of the review of salaries and bonuses was as follows: 

31 March 2020 

G S Marsh 
P O James 
J L Macmichael 
M T Richards  

1 April 2019 to 
31 March 2020 
Salary pa 
(£’000) 
175 
130 
150 
150 
______ 

1 April 2020 to 
31 March 2021 
Salary pa 
(£’000) 
185 
145 
160 
160 
______ 

From 1 April 
2021 
Salary pa 
(£’000) 
200 
165 
165 
165 
______ 

1 April 2019 to 
31 March 2020 
 Bonus (£’000) 

1 April 2020 to 
31 March 2021 
 Bonus (£’000) 

149 
111 
128 
128 
______ 

111 
87 
96 
96 
______ 

Directors’ remuneration for the year ended 31 March 2021 is set out on page 56 of this document. 

(ii) Chairman and Non-Executive Director remuneration 
The  Chairman  and  the  Non-Executive  Directors  receive  a  fixed  fee  set  out  in  the  table  below.  The  fixed  fee  covers 
preparation  for  and  attendance  at  meetings  of  the  full  Board  and  committees  thereof.    Should  there  be  any  services 
provided in relation to “special projects” that may arise there may be an appropriate incremental fee agreed for these 
services. 

The Executive Directors are responsible for setting the level of Non-Executive remuneration. The Non-Executive Directors 
are also reimbursed for all reasonable expenses incurred in attending meetings. 

The Non-Executive Directors are not eligible to participate in the Company’s performance related bonus plan or long term 
incentive plans. Full terms and conditions for each of the Non-Executive Directors are available at the Company’s registered 
office during normal business hours and will be available upon request at the AGM for 15 minutes prior to the meeting and 
during the meeting. 

54 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
REMUNERATION COMMITTEE REPORT (continued) 

(iii) Equity-based incentive schemes for 2021 
The Committee strongly believes that equity-based incentive schemes increase the focus of employees in improving Group 
performance, whilst at the same time providing a strong incentive for retaining and attracting individuals of a high calibre. 

Enterprise Management incentive scheme (‘EMI’) 
The Solid State plc Enterprise Management Incentive Scheme (‘EMI’), comprising conditional (performance-related) share 
awards  (technically  structured  as  nominal  cost  options  pursuant  to  which  participants  must  pay  0.1p  per  share  on  the 
exercise of their awards). 

The last grant was made in June 2017. There were 48,000 EMI options awarded to each Director in June 2017. These options 
vest in three equal tranches based on performance conditions in respect of each year ending 31 March 2018, 31 March 
2019, and 31 March 2020. 

The 2017 EMI awards are subject to two performance conditions. Firstly, the executive must remain in post at the vesting 
date,  secondly  the  options  fully  vest  based  on  exceeding  the  board  approved  budget  by  25%.  Vesting  commences  for 
performance in excess of the board approved budget with the options vesting pro-rata on a straight-line basis up to 25% 
above the board approved budget where the awards fully vest. The market value at the date of grant was £4.23. 

Awards that do not vest as a result of not meeting the performance criteria in any particular year lapse. 

Company Share Option Plan (CSOP) 

For 2021, normal CSOP awards of up to the HMRC tax approved levels of £30,000 may be made to senior staff and Executive 
Directors, as outlined in the Policy Table. For all participants, awards will vest after three years in accordance  with the 
performance  conditions  applicable  to  each  grant.  The  performance  conditions  will  be  determined  and  set  by  the 
Remuneration Committee in accordance with the remuneration policy. No award will vest below Threshold performance, 
and vesting will increase on a straight-line basis between Threshold, Target and Stretch. 

Long Term Incentive Plan (LTIP) 

For 2021, normal LTIP awards of up to 125% of salary may be made to Executive Directors, as outlined in the Policy Table. 
For all participants, awards will vest after three years in accordance with the performance conditions applicable to each 
grant. The performance conditions will be determined and set by the Remuneration Committee in accordance with the 
remuneration policy.  No award will vest below Threshold performance, and vesting will increase on a straight-line basis 
between Threshold, Target and Stretch.   

For the year ahead the Remuneration Committee intends to make a share option award in the range of 45% to 75% of 
salary  which  will  be  granted  subsequent  to  the  AGM  when  the  shareholders  will  participate  in  an  advisory vote  at  the 
forthcoming AGM (resolution 2).  

The Remuneration Committee intend to make annual awards in accordance with the Policy principles following the AGM 
where they have had the results of the shareholders advisory vote. 

55 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
REMUNERATION COMMITTEE REPORT (continued) 

Remuneration for 31 March 2021 

The value of all elements of remuneration received by each Director in the year was as follows: 

31 March 2021 

G S Marsh 
P O James 
J L Macmichael 
M T Richards  
N Rogers* 
P Haining  
P J Magowan** 

Consultant 
fees 
£’000 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
13 
- 
______ 
13 
______ 
*Mr N Rogers was appointed on 17 November 2020 as Chairman and his annual fee of £62,000 has been charged pro-rata. 

Cash Bonus 
**** 
£’000 
111 
87 
96 
96 
- 
- 
- 
______ 
390 
______ 

EMI share 
bonus*** 
£’000 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
______ 
- 
______ 

Benefits 
in kind 
£’000 
31 
23 
34 
3 
- 
- 
- 
______ 
91 
______ 

Salary/ 
Fees 
£’000 
185 
145 
160 
160 
42 
12 
7 
______ 
711 
______ 

Pension 
Cont’n 
£’000 
3 
5 
3 
6 
- 
1 
- 
______ 
18 
______ 

Total 

Single 
figure Total 
£’000 
330 
260 
293 
265 
42 
26 
7 
______ 
1,223 
______ 

**Mr P Magowan was appointed on 1 January 2021 as such his annual fee of £30,000 has been charged pro-rata. 

*** There was no LTIP or EMI shares granted which were due to vest in the period. 

**** All Bonuses including the Director bonuses have been accrued however payment was deferred until the end of Q1 when the audited results had 
been signed off. 

31 March 2020 

G S Marsh 
P O James 
J L Macmichael 
M T Richards  
A B Frere 
N Rogers* 
P Haining  
J M Lavery** 

Total 

Salary/ 
Fees 
£’000 
175 
130 
150 
150 
12 
23 
12 
5 
______ 
657 
______ 

Consultant 
Fees 
£’000 
- 
- 
- 
- 
51 
- 
13 
5 
______ 
69 
______ 

EMI share 
bonus*** 
£’000 
61 
61 
61 
61 
- 
- 
- 
- 
______ 
244 
______ 

Cash Bonus 
**** 
£’000 
149 
111 
128 
128 
- 
- 
- 
- 
______ 
516 
______ 

Benefits 
in kind 
£’000 
35 
25 
31 
22 
- 
- 
- 
- 
______ 
113 
______ 

Pension 
Cont’n 
£’000 
7 
5 
6 
6 
- 
- 
- 
- 
______ 
24 
______ 

Single 
figure total 
£’000 
427 
332 
376 
367 
63 
23 
25 
10 
______ 
1,623 
______ 

*Mr N Rogers was appointed on 1 July 2019 as such his annual fee of £30,000 has been charged pro-rata. 

**Mr J M Lavery retired on 31 August 2019 as such his annual fee of £12,000 has been charged pro-rata. 

*** 16,000 EMI share bonus options vested in relation to the financial year ended 31 March 2020 performance. The valuation of these options included 
in the single figure total remuneration above is based on the 31 March 2020 share price of £3.84. 

**** All Bonuses including the Director bonuses have been accrued however payment was deferred until the end of Q1 where comfort had been obtained 
over the cash impact of COVID-19 had been assessed and it was appropriate to pay the bonuses earned in respect of FY19/20 performance. 

The principal benefits in kind relate to the provision of company cars, fuel, and private healthcare. 

Of the current year share based payments charge £77k (2020: £244k) relates to the Directors. 

In addition to the above consultancy fees, additional fees totalling £25k (2020: £42k) arose during the year in respect of 
accountancy services and out of pocket expenses provided by The Kings Mill Practice, a firm of which Mr P Haining is the 
proprietor.  A balance of £9k (2020: £9k) was due to The Kings Mill Practice at 31 March 2021. 

56 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
REMUNERATION COMMITTEE REPORT (continued) 

The Directors’ interest in the issued ordinary share capital of the Company at today’s date, at 31 March 2021 and 31 March 
2020 or date of appointment if later, were as follows: 

13 July 21 

31 March 21 

31 March 20 

G S Marsh 
M T Richards 
P O James 
J L Macmichael 
N Rogers 
P Haining 
P J Magowan* 

280,906 
10,375 
3,204 
122,430 
4,400 
54,564 
4,000 

280,906 
10,375 
3,204 
122,430 
4,400 
54,564 
4,000 

280,849 
7,475 
684 
122,373 
4,400 
54,505 
n/a 

*appointed to the Board on 1 January 2021 

Long Term Incentive Plan and Enterprise Management Incentive scheme (‘EMI’) 

Details of the options over the Company’s shares granted under the LTIP and Enterprise Management Incentives Scheme 
are as follows: 

Options 
held at 
31.03.20 
16,000 

32,000 

32,000 

32,000 

Granted 
10,700 

Exercised 
- 

Lapsed 

10,700 

10,700 

10,700 

- 

- 

16,000 

- 

- 

- 

- 

Options 
held at 
31.03.21 
26,700 

Exercise 
Price 
0.1p – 5p 

Date of 
grant 
28.10.20  April 2018 to April 2030 

Exercise  
period 

42,700 

0.1p – 5p 

28.10.20  April 2018 to April 2030 

42,700 

0.1p – 5p 

28.10.20  April 2018 to April 2030 

26,700 

0.1p – 5p 

28.10.20  April 2018 to April 2030 

G S Marsh 

P O James 

M T Richards 

J L Macmichael 

During the year to 31 March 2021, the Board Granted an award of 10,700 shares to each of the Executive Directors which 
subject to the performance criteria will be eligible to vest in 2023. 

Mr J L Macmichael exercised 16,000 share options with an exercise price of 0.01p on the 2 July 2020 and sold an equivalent 
16,000 shares which he already held on the 1 July 2020 at a price of £5.20 resulting in net proceeds and a gain of £83,200. 

The market price of the shares on 31 March 2021 was £8.30 (2020: £3.84), with a quoted range during the year of £3.51 to 
£9.00 (2020: £2.45 to £6.75). 

Options 
held at 
31.03.19 
32,000 

32,000 

32,000 

32,000 

Granted 
- 

Exercised 
16,000 

Lapsed 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

Options 
held at 
31.03.20 
16,000 

32,000 

32,000 

32,000 

- 

- 

- 

- 

Exercise 
price 

0.01p 

0.01p 

0.01p 

0.01p 

Date of 
grant 
01.06.17  April 2018 to April 2027 

Exercise  
period 

01.06.17  April 2018 to April 2027 

01.06.17  April 2018 to April 2027 

01.06.17  April 2018 to April 2027 

G S Marsh 

P O James 

M T Richards 

J L Macmichael 

During the year to 31 March 2020, the performance criteria for the final tranche of the options was met and as such 16,000 
shares vested of each Director’s options totalling 64,000 options. All the options held at the balance sheet date had vested, 
and 16,000 of these have been exercised post period end as noted above. 

Mr G S Marsh exercised and sold 16,000 options with an exercise price of 0.01p on the 13 January 2020 and sold them on 
the 16 January 2020 at a price of £6.35 resulting in net proceeds of £101,584. 

P J Magowan 
Remuneration Committee Chairman 
13 July 2021 

57 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
DIRECTORS’ REPORT 

The Directors submit their report together with the audited financial statements of the Group in respect of the year ended 
31 March 2021.  

Principal Activities, Review of the Business and Future Developments  

The principal activities of the Group during the year continued to be those of the manufacturing of electronic equipment 
and the value added supplier of electronic components and materials. 

The key performance indicators recognised by management are set out in the KPI section of the strategic report on page 
18. 

An overall review of the Group’s trading performance and future developments is given in the Chairman’s Statement and 
Strategic Report. Other than as reported in the corporate and social responsibility section of this report the Group does not 
comment on environmental matters. 

Directors  
The Directors of the Company during the year were:  
N F Rogers 
G S Marsh  
P O James, BSc FCA 
J L Macmichael 
M T Richards  
P Haining, FCA 
P Magowan (appointed 1 January 2021)  

Details  of  the  interests  of  Directors  in  the  shares  of  the  Company  and  Directors’  service  contracts  are  stated  in  the 
Remuneration Committee Report on pages 44 to 57.  

Corporate Governance  

The Board confirms that the Group has had regard, throughout the accounting period, with the provisions set out in the 
Quoted  Companies  Alliance  (QCA)  Code  and  the  UK  Corporate  Governance  Code  which  was  issued  by  the  Financial 
Reporting Council in April 2016.  

Details of how the Group has adopted the QCA Code and corporate governance principles are set out in the corporate 
governance report on pages 24 to 38. 

Internal Control  

Details  of  how  the  board  has  implemented  its  internal  control  framework  and  processes  are  set  out  in  the  corporate 
governance report on pages 24 to 38. 

Board of Directors  

The structure and operation of the Board of Directors is set out in the corporate governance report on pages 24 to 38 . 

Principal risks and uncertainties  

Details of the principal risks and uncertainties of the Group are set out in the strategic report on pages 11 to 15. 

Financial Instruments  

Details of the use of financial instruments by the Group are contained in note 21 of the financial statements. 

Purchase of Own Shares  

At the year end the Company had in place authority to purchase up to 15% of the issued ordinary shares under authority 
given by a resolution at the Annual General Meeting on 9 September 2020. This authority expires on 9 March 2022. During 
the year the company repurchased 15,000 shares with a nominal value of £750 at market value of £95k in to treasury shares 
which get used for the all employee share scheme. 

Dividends  

Details of the dividends are disclosed in note 9 and in the Chairman’s Statement on page 5. 

58 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
DIRECTORS’ REPORT (continued) 

Research and Development 

During the year the Group has continued to invest in research and development in partnership with some of its customers 
to  develop  technical  electronic  solutions  to  address  the  demand  of  our  customers  in  their  core  markets  of  electronic 
communications, mobile battery power and rugged and industrial computing. During the year we  invested in excess of 
£1.5m (2020: £1.3m) in research and development. The Company continues to claim R&D tax credits where eligible.  

Share options award 

On 30 September 2020 and 28 October 2020, the company granted options to the Senior Leadership team and the Executive 
Directors under the  Company’s CSOP and LTIP respectively, further details are provided in the remuneration report on 
pages 44 to 57 and note 28. 

Employee engagement 

Further details are set out in the corporate governance report on pages 24 to 38. 

Insurance 

The Group has in place appropriate Directors’ and Officers’ indemnity insurance for all Group companies. 

Business relationships  

Further details are set out in the corporate governance report on pages 24 to 38. 

Going Concern  

Further details are set out in the corporate governance report on pages 24 to 38 . 

Renewal of authority to purchase the Company’s shares and authorities to issue shares. 

Last year, a resolution was passed at the Annual General Meeting to give the Company the authority to purchase its own 
Ordinary shares on the Stock Exchange.  This authority would expire after a period of eighteen months from the passing of 
the resolution. In order to avoid this authority expiring during the next year and the need to call an extraordinary general 
meeting to renew the authority, a resolution to renew the authority is set out in the notice of the Annual General Meeting 
at the end of this document. 

Under the terms of the resolution to be proposed at the Annual General Meeting, the maximum number of shares which 
may be purchased is 15% of the issued Ordinary share capital of the Company.  The minimum price payable by the Company 
for its Ordinary shares will be 5p and the maximum price will be determined by reference to current market prices.  The 
authority will automatically expire after a period of eighteen months from the passing of the resolution unless renewed. 

It is not the Directors’ current intention to exercise the power to purchase the Company’s Ordinary shares, but they believe 
that under certain circumstances it would be in the Company’s best interests to do so. 

Resolutions are also being proposed at the Annual General Meeting to issue further shares.  One resolution will authorise 
the company to issue new shares up to a third of the current issued share capital by way of a rights issue and the second 
resolution will authorise the company to issue new shares up to 10% of the current issued share capital without rights of 
pre-emption for existing shareholders, and to the extent that new shares are issued under the second resolution the limit 
on the first resolution will be reduced such that the total number of new shares issued cannot exceed one third of the 
current share capital. 

Your Directors consider that the resolutions to be proposed at the meeting are in the best interests of the Company and its 
shareholders.  They unanimously recommend that all Ordinary shareholders vote in favour of the resolution at the Annual 
General Meeting as they intend to do in respect of their beneficial holdings. 

59 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
DIRECTORS’ REPORT (continued) 

Nigel Rogers  (dob: April 1961), Non-Executive Director (appointed 01 July 2019) 
Nigel qualified as a Chartered Accountant in 1983 with PwC. He became Group Finance Director of Stadium Group plc in 
1996, before progressing to Group Chief Executive Officer in 2001. He joined 600 Group plc as Group Chief Executive Officer 
in 2012 and led the turnaround of the AIM-quoted global machine tool business, increasing strategic focus on the growth 
of  its  laser  marking  business  until  leaving  in  April  2015  to  begin  a  plural  career.  Nigel  is  also  Chairman  of  Transense 
Technologies plc and Chairman of Surgical Innovations Group plc. 

Gary Marsh, (dob: April 1966), Chief Executive Officer 
Gary joined the Company in 1986 having gained an HND in Business and Finance Studies.  He has held various positions 
within the Group including that of Operations Director of Solid State Supplies prior to his appointment as its Managing 
Director in 1997.  In addition to this role, Gary was appointed Group Managing Director in 2002 following the acquisition of 
Steatite. In 2011 following the acquisition of Rugged Systems he was appointed as Group Chief Executive Officer. 

Peter James, (dob: June 1979), Director 
Peter qualified as a Chartered Accountant with PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP (PwC) in 2003. He was appointed to the Board 
of Solid State PLC in February 2017. Before joining Solid State PLC, Peter was Group Financial Controller at IQE plc where 
he was a key member of the senior leadership team successfully completing two significant transactions, funded through 
an equity fund raising and a global refinancing. Subsequently he led the integration project, aligning the enlarged Group 
with its customer markets serviced by manufacturing sites, delivering efficiency and material savings. At PwC Peter gained 
a wide range of experience in Audit and Financial Due Diligence advising a broad range of companies in a variety of sectors, 
including multinational main market and AIM listed companies. In addition, on a voluntary basis Peter is a Non-Executive 
Director for the British Water Ski and Wakeboard Federation Limited providing independent financial oversight as Chair of 
the Audit and Finance Committee. 

John Macmichael, (dob: April 1961), Director 
John  is  an  electronics  and  communications  graduate  whose  career  has  encompassed  design  and  development  through 
applications  engineering,  sales,  sales  management  and  general  business  management.  John  has  gained  extensive 
management experience of multiple sales channels with distributors and OEMs both here in the UK and worldwide through 
his international sales management role whilst living in the USA. Formerly managing Director of Breckenridge Technologies 
Limited,  John  joined  Solid  State  Supplies  Limited  in  2006  before  being  appointed  managing  Director  in  April  2011.  He 
presently runs the Value Added Supplies on behalf of Solid State PLC. 

Matthew Richards, (dob: October 1963), Director 
Matthew was appointed as Managing Director of Steatite Limited in April 2016. Matthew comes to the Board with 30 years 
of experience in the defence electronics industry. He has a track record of success in both private and public companies, 
most  recently  as  Senior  Vice  President  and  Managing  Director  at  API  Technologies  Corp  running  operations  in  the  UK, 
Canada  and  USA,  specialising  in  RF  and  Security  solutions  with  a  focus  on  high  reliability  and  harsh  environment 
applications. Prior to that, Matthew held business development and sales leadership roles with the L3 Corporation. He has 
extensive experience dealing with the Government customers at home and abroad having travelled extensively in Europe, 
the Middle East and Asia. Matthew started his career installing and commissioning terrestrial and satellite antennas systems 
for broadcast and military users before moving into sales in the early 1980s. 

Pete Magowan, (dob August 1967), Senior Independent Non-Executive Director (appointed Jan 2021).  
Pete holds a Bachelor of Science degree in Electrical and Electronic Engineering from the University of Manchester Institute 
of Science and Technology and a Diploma in Marketing from the University of Bristol Business School. Pete started his career 
in marketing with STMicroelectronics before becoming an early employee and main board member of ARM Holdings plc. 
Pete then went on to become a General Partner at Alta Berkeley Ventures and an Executive at Fidelity International. Pete 
is also a Non Executive director of Filtronics plc. 

Peter Haining FCA, (dob: September 1956), Non-Executive Director and Company Secretary 
Peter Haining qualified as a chartered accountant in 1980 and later worked at Binder Hamlyn. He left Binder Hamlyn in 
1992, together with three colleagues, to establish The Kings Mill Partnership.  

60 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
DIRECTORS’ REPORT (continued) 

Statement of Directors’ Responsibilities  

The Directors are responsible for preparing the Annual Report, Strategic Report, the Directors’ Report and the Group and 
parent  company  financial  statements  in  accordance  with  applicable  law  and  regulations.  Company  law  requires  the 
Directors to prepare Group and parent company financial statements for each financial year. The Directors have elected 
under company law to prepare the Group financial statements in accordance with international accounting standards in 
conformity with the requirements of the Companies Act 2006 and have elected under company law to prepare the parent 
company  financial  statements  in  accordance  with  United  Kingdom  Generally  Accepted  Accounting  Practice  (United 
Kingdom Accounting Standards and applicable law).  

The  group  financial  statements  are  required  by  law  and  international  accounting  standards  in  conformity  with  the 
requirements  of  the  Companies  Act  2006  to  present  fairly  the  financial  position  and  performance  of  the  group.  The 
Companies Act 2006 provides in relation to such financial statements that references in the relevant part of that Act to 
financial statements giving a true and fair view are references to their achieving a fair presentation.  

Under company law the Directors must not approve the financial statements unless they are satisfied that they give a true 
and fair view of the state of affairs of the Group and parent company and of the profit or loss of the Group for that period. 
In preparing each of the Group and parent company financial statements, the Directors are required to: 

select suitable accounting policies and then apply them consistently; 

• 
•  make judgements and estimates that are reasonable and prudent; 
• 

for  the  Group  financial  statements,  state  whether  they  have  been  prepared  in  accordance  with  international 
accounting standards in conformity with the requirements of the Companies Act 2006; 
for  the  parent  company  financial  statements,  state  whether  applicable  UK  Accounting  Standards  have  been 
followed, subject to any material departures disclosed and explained in the financial statements; and 

• 

•  prepare the financial statements on the going concern basis unless it is inappropriate to presume that the Group 

and the parent company will continue in business. 

The Directors are responsible for keeping adequate accounting records that are sufficient to show and explain the Group’s 
and Company’s transactions and disclose with reasonable accuracy at any time the  financial position of the Group  and 
Company to enable them to ensure that the financial statements comply with the requirements of the Companies Act 2006. 
They are also responsible for safeguarding the assets of the Group and hence for taking reasonable steps for the prevention 
and detection of fraud and other irregularities. In addition, the Directors are responsible the maintenance and integrity of 
the  corporate  and  financial  information  included  in  the  Solid  State  plc  website.  Legislation  in  the  UK  governing  the 
preparation and dissemination of financial statements may differ from legislation in other jurisdictions. 

Auditors  

Each of the persons who are Directors at the time when this Directors’ Report is approved has confirmed that: 

• 

• 

so far as that Director is aware, there is no relevant audit information of which the parent company’s auditors are 
unaware, and 
that Director has taken all steps that ought to have been taken as a Director in order to be aware of any information 
needed  by  the  auditors  in  connection  with  preparing  their  report  and  to  establish  that  the  parent  company’s 
auditors are aware of that information. 

A resolution to re-appoint RSM UK Audit LLP as auditors will be proposed at the next annual general meeting. 

By order of the Board  

P Haining FCA  
Secretary  
13 July 2021 

Registered Office: 2 Ravensbank Business Park, Hedera Road, Redditch, B98 9EY 

61 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
REPORT OF THE INDEPENDENT AUDITORS 
TO THE SHAREHOLDERS OF SOLID STATE PLC 

Opinion 
We have audited the financial statements of Solid State plc (the ‘parent company’) and its subsidiaries (the ‘Group’) for the 
year  ended  31  March  2021  which  comprise  the  Consolidated  Statement  of  Comprehensive  Income,  the  Consolidated 
Statement of Changes in Equity, The Consolidated Statement of Financial Position, The Consolidated Statement of Cash 
Flows,  The  Company  Statement  of  Financial  Position,  The  Company  Statement  of  Changes  in  Equity  and  notes  to  the 
financial statements, including significant accounting policies. The financial reporting framework that has been applied in 
the preparation of the group financial statements is applicable law and International Accounting Standards in conformity 
with  the  requirements  of  the  Companies  Act  2006.  The  financial  reporting  framework  that  has  been  applied  in  the 
preparation  of  the  parent  company  financial  statements  is  applicable  law  and  United  Kingdom  Accounting  Standards, 
including Financial Reporting Standard 102 “The Financial Reporting Standard applicable in the UK and Republic of Ireland” 
(United Kingdom Generally Accepted Accounting Practice). 

In our opinion:  

• 

• 

• 

• 

the financial statements give a true and fair view of the state of the Group’s and of the parent company’s affairs as 
at 31 March 2021 and of the Group’s profit for the year then ended; 

the Group financial statements have been properly prepared in accordance with International Accounting Standards 
in conformity with the requirements of the Companies Act 2006; 

the  parent  company  financial  statements  have  been  properly  prepared  in  accordance  with  United  Kingdom 
Generally Accepted Accounting Practice; and 

the financial statements have been prepared in accordance with the requirements of the Companies Act 2006. 

Basis for opinion 
We conducted our audit in accordance with International Standards on Auditing (UK) (ISAs (UK)) and applicable law. Our 
responsibilities under those standards are further described in the Auditor’s responsibilities for the audit of the financial 
statements section of our report. We are independent of the group and the parent company in accordance with the ethical 
requirements that are relevant to our audit of the financial statements in the UK, including the FRC’s Ethical Standard as 
applied to listed entities and we have fulfilled our other ethical responsibilities in accordance with these requirements. We 
believe that the audit evidence we have obtained is sufficient and appropriate to provide a basis for our opinion. 

Conclusions relating to going concern 
In auditing the financial statements, we have concluded that the Directors’ use of the going concern basis of accounting in 
the preparation of the financial statements is appropriate. Our evaluation of the Directors’ assessment of the group’s and 
parent company’s ability to continue to adopt the going concern basis of accounting included: 

• 

• 

• 

understanding how the cash flow forecasts for the going concern period had been prepared and the assumptions 
used by management; 

challenging the assumptions used by management in the forecasts;  

considering management’s sensitivities against current trading performance and the resulting potential impact on 
headroom. 

Based on the work we have performed, we have not identified any material uncertainties relating to events or conditions 
that, individually or collectively, may cast significant doubt on the group’s or the parent company’s ability to continue as a 
going concern for a period of at least twelve months from  when the financial statements are authorised for issue. 

Our responsibilities and the responsibilities of the Directors with respect to going concern are described in the relevant 
sections of this report. 

62 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
REPORT OF THE INDEPENDENT AUDITORS 
TO THE SHAREHOLDERS OF SOLID STATE PLC (continued) 

Summary of our audit approach 
Key audit matters 

Materiality 

Scope 

No key audit matters 

Revenue recognition 
Acquisition accounting 
Inventory valuation and provisioning 

Group 
• 
• 
• 
Parent Company 
• 
Group 
• 
• 
Parent Company 
• 
• 
Our audit procedures covered 93% of revenue, 85% of total assets and 93% of 
profit before tax. 

Overall materiality: £321,000 (2020: £348,000) 
Performance materiality: £240,000 (2020: £261,000) 

Overall materiality: £375,000 (2020: £350,000) 
Performance materiality: £281,000 (2020: £263,000) 

Key audit matters 
Key audit matters are those matters that, in our professional judgment, were of most significance in our audit of the 
group financial statements of the current period and include the most significant assessed risks of material misstatement 
(whether or not due to fraud) we identified, including those which had the greatest effect on the overall audit strategy, 
the allocation of resources in the audit and directing the efforts of the engagement team. These matters were addressed 
in the context of our audit of the group financial statements as a whole, and in forming our opinion thereon, and we do 
not provide a separate opinion on these matters.  

Group key audit matters 

Revenue recognition 
Key  audit  matter 
description 

the  matter 
in 

How 
was  addressed 
the audit 

The risk – revenue recognition 

Refer to accounting policies and critical accounting judgements in notes 1 and 2 to the group 
financial statements and note 3.  

The group’s revenue comprises sales of electronic equipment to its customers after deductions 
for discounts and anticipated returns. There are also certain contracts where retentions have 
been received or where obligations are satisfied in stages.  

Revenue underpins the key measures of performance of the group.  

There is a risk that revenue could be misstated through: 

• 
• 
• 

inappropriate application of the group’s revenue recognition policies; 
recognition of revenue in the wrong period; or 
inaccurate estimates for returns. 

Our response 

We  assessed  whether  revenue  was  recognised  in  line  with  the  Group’s  revenue  recognition 
policies and IFRS 15.  

Our procedures included a combination of controls, data analytics and substantive testing. We 
selected a sample of items to check that revenue was recognised on shipment and that the cut-
off of revenue transactions around the year end was appropriate.  

We critically assess the revenue recognition for specific contracts where revenue is recognised 
over  the  course  of  the  agreement  and  resulted  in  deferred  income.  We  also  reviewed  the 
provision for returns by assessment of the level and nature of post year end credit notes.  

Transactions  posted  to  nominal  ledger  codes  outside  of  the  normal  revenue  cycle  were 
identified using a data analytic tool and investigated. 

63 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
REPORT OF THE INDEPENDENT AUDITORS 
TO THE SHAREHOLDERS OF SOLID STATE PLC (continued) 

Group key audit matters 

Acquisition accounting 
Key  audit  matter 
description 

The risk – acquisition accounting 
Refer  to  accounting  policies  and  critical  accounting  judgements  in  notes  1  and  2  to  the  group 
financial statements and note 31. 

How  the  matter 
was addressed in 
the audit 

During the year the Group acquired the Willow Technologies Limited and Active Silicon Limited 
groups.  There  is  a  risk  that  the  acquisition  was  not  accounted  for  in  accordance  with  IFRS  3 
Business Combinations.  

There  were  a  number  of  judgements  and  estimates  involved  in  accounting  for  the  acquisition, 
most  notably  in  relation  to  fair  value  adjustments  to  the  acquired  balance  sheet,  valuation  of 
contingent consideration and the recognition of acquisition intangible assets and goodwill. 

Our response 
We considered the completeness of assets and liabilities identified on acquisition.  

We reviewed and challenged management’s judgements and estimates for the fair value of assets, 
liabilities  and  contingent  liabilities  acquired.  This  included  reperforming  the  calculations  and 
assessing the assumptions used in separating brand and customer lists. We applied sensitivities to 
the key assumptions and considered the impact on the valuation.  

We reviewed and challenged the assumptions used by management in determining the fair value 
of the variable consideration in line with the acquisition agreement, including considering post 
year-end and forecast trading performance of the acquired entities.  

Our procedures also considered management’s rationalisation of the residual goodwill value.  

The disclosures included in the financial statements were compared against the requirements of 
IFRS 3. 

Inventory valuation and provisioning 
Key  audit  matter 
description 

The risk – inventory valuation and provisioning 
Refer to accounting policies and critical accounting judgements in notes 1, 2 and 15.  

The  group  holds  a  combination  of  finished  goods  and  goods  for  re-sale,  together  with work  in 
progress. Finished goods and goods for re-sale comprise a range of bought-in and manufactured 
specialist electronic equipment. Work in progress is substantially the material cost of assemblies 
and manufactured products at varying stages of completion at the year end.  

The valuation of inventory, which by its nature is specialist, involves judgement relating to the 
potential obsolescence of inventory including net realisable value (NRV). 

The group has in place a policy for addressing this risk and recognises provisions accordingly. 

How  the  matter 
was addressed in 
the audit 

Our Response 
We attended and undertook physical inventory counts at key locations across the group, including 
those acquired during the year, validating that inventory held was accurately recorded and was in 
good physical condition.  

We  reviewed  and  tested  the  year-end 
management, including their arithmetic integrity.  

inventory  provisioning  calculations  prepared  by 

We  have  obtained  justification  from  management  on  the  assumptions  adopted  within  the 
provisioning  calculations  and  assessed  any  specific  areas  where  a  provision  was  considered 
necessary. We performed testing to ensure that the valuation of inventory is stated at the lower 
of cost or NRV by comparing the sales value of the products to their actual cost. We are satisfied 
with the adequacy of the going concern disclosures within the financial statements. 

Parent company key audit matters 
We have determined that there are no key audit matters to communicate in our report. 

64 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
REPORT OF THE INDEPENDENT AUDITORS 
TO THE SHAREHOLDERS OF SOLID STATE PLC (continued) 

Our application of materiality 
When establishing our overall audit strategy, we set certain thresholds which help us to determine the nature, timing and 
extent of our audit procedures. When evaluating whether the effects of misstatements, both individually and on the 
financial statements as a whole, could reasonably influence the economic decisions of the users we take into account the 
qualitative nature and the size of the misstatements. Based on our professional judgement, we determined materiality as 
follows:  

Group  

Parent company 

Overall materiality 

£375,000 (2020: £350,000) 

£321,000 (2020: £348,000) 

Basis  for  determining  overall 
materiality 

7% of adjusted profit before tax 

5% of net assets 

Rationale 
applied 

for  benchmark 

Adjusted  result  before  tax  chosen  as 
the Group is profit oriented 

Net  assets  chosen  as  the  parent  is  a 
holding company 

Performance materiality 

£281,000 (2020: £263,000) 

£240,000 (2020: £261,000) 

for 
Basis 
performance materiality 

determining 

Reporting  of  misstatements 
to the Audit Committee 

75% of overall materiality 

75% of overall materiality 

Misstatements  in  excess  of  £20,000 
that 
and  misstatements 
threshold that, in our view, warranted 
reporting on qualitative grounds.  

below 

Misstatements in excess of £20,000 and 
misstatements  below  that  threshold 
that, in our view, warranted reporting on 
qualitative grounds.  

An overview of the scope of our audit 
The group consists of 10 components, located in the United Kingdom, USA and Ireland.  

The coverage achieved by our audit procedures was: 

Full scope audits were performed for 4 components, specific audit procedures for 3 components and analytical procedures 
at group level for the remaining 3 components.  

Full scope audit 

Specific audit 
procedures  

Total 

Number of 
components 
4 

3 

7 

Revenue 

Total assets 

Profit before tax 

93% 

-% 

93% 

80% 

5% 

85% 

93% 

-% 

93% 

Analytical procedures at Group level were performed for the remaining 3 components. 

65 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
REPORT OF THE INDEPENDENT AUDITORS 
TO THE SHAREHOLDERS OF SOLID STATE PLC (continued) 

Specific  audit  procedures  were  carried  out  in  respect  of  components  acquired  during  the  period  which  did  not  have  a 
significant  impact  on  revenue  or  profit  before  tax  for  the  Group  in  the  period.  Specific  procedures  were  carried  out  in 
respect of inventory at the period end. 

Other information 

The other information comprises the information included in the annual report, other than the financial statements and 
our auditor’s report thereon. The Directors are responsible for the other information contained within the annual report. 
Our opinion on the financial statements does not cover the other information and, except to the extent otherwise explicitly 
stated in our report, we do not express any form of assurance conclusion thereon.  

Our responsibility is to read the other information and, in doing so, consider whether the other information is materially 
inconsistent with the financial statements, or our knowledge obtained in the course of the audit or otherwise appears to 
be materially misstated. If we identify such material inconsistencies or apparent material misstatements, we are required 
to determine whether this gives rise to a material misstatement in the financial statements themselves. If, based on the 
work we have performed, we conclude that there is a material misstatement of this other information, we are required to 
report that fact.  

We have nothing to report in this regard. 

Opinions on other matters prescribed by the Companies Act 2006 

In our opinion, based on the work undertaken in the course of the audit: 

• 

• 

the information given in the Strategic Report and the Directors’ Report for the financial year for which the financial 
statements are prepared is consistent with the financial statements; and 
the  Strategic  Report  and  the  Directors’  Report  have  been  prepared  in  accordance  with  applicable  legal 
requirements. 

Matters on which we are required to report by exception 

In the light of the knowledge and understanding of the group and the parent company and their environment obtained in 
the course of the audit, we have not identified material misstatements in the Strategic Report or the Directors’ Report. 

We have nothing to report in respect of the following matters in relation to which the Companies Act 2006 requires us to 
report to you if, in our opinion: 

• 

adequate accounting records have not been kept by the parent company, or returns adequate for our audit have 
not been received from branches not visited by us; or 
• 
the parent company financial statements are not in agreement with the accounting records and returns; or 
• 
certain disclosures of Directors’ remuneration specified by law are not made; or 
•  we have not received all the information and explanations we require for our audit. 

Responsibilities of Directors 

As explained more fully in the Statement of Directors’ Responsibilities set out on page 61, the Directors are responsible for 
the preparation of the financial statements and for being satisfied that they give a true and fair view, and for such internal 
control as the Directors determine is necessary to enable the preparation of financial statements that are free from material 
misstatement, whether due to fraud or error. 

In preparing the financial statements, the Directors are responsible for assessing the group’s and the parent company’s 
ability  to  continue  as  a  going  concern,  disclosing,  as  applicable,  matters  related  to  going  concern  and  using  the  going 
concern basis of accounting unless the Directors either intend to liquidate the group or the parent company or to cease 
operations, or have no realistic alternative but to do so. 

Auditor’s responsibilities for the audit of the financial statements 

Our objectives are to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements as a whole are free from material 
misstatement,  whether  due  to  fraud  or  error,  and  to  issue  an  auditor’s  report  that  includes  our  opinion.  Reasonable 
assurance is a high level of assurance but is not a guarantee that an audit conducted in accordance with ISAs (UK) will always 
detect a material misstatement when it exists. Misstatements can arise from fraud or error and are considered material if, 
individually or in the aggregate, they could reasonably be expected to influence the economic decisions of users taken on 
the basis of these financial statements. 

66 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
REPORT OF THE INDEPENDENT AUDITORS 
TO THE SHAREHOLDERS OF SOLID STATE PLC (continued) 

The extent to which the audit was considered capable of detecting irregularities, including fraud 

Irregularities are instances of non-compliance with laws and regulations.  The objectives of our audit are to obtain sufficient 
appropriate audit evidence regarding compliance with laws and regulations that have a direct effect on the determination 
of material amounts and disclosures in the financial statements, to perform audit procedures to help identify instances of 
non-compliance with other laws and regulations that may have a material effect on the financial statements, and to respond 
appropriately to identified or suspected non-compliance with laws and regulations identified during the audit.  

In relation to fraud, the objectives of our audit are to identify and assess the risk of material misstatement of the financial 
statements  due  to  fraud,  to  obtain  sufficient  appropriate  audit  evidence  regarding  the  assessed  risks  of  material 
misstatement due to fraud through designing and implementing appropriate responses and to respond appropriately to 
fraud or suspected fraud identified during the audit.   

However, it is the primary responsibility of management, with the oversight of those charged with governance, to ensure 
that the entity's operations are conducted in accordance with the provisions of laws and regulations and for the prevention 
and detection of fraud. 

In  identifying  and  assessing  risks  of  material  misstatement  in  respect  of  irregularities,  including  fraud,  the  group  audit 
engagement team:  

• 

• 

• 

obtained an understanding of the nature of the industry and sector, including the legal and regulatory frameworks 
that the group and parent company operate in and how the group and parent company are complying with the legal 
and regulatory frameworks; 
inquired of management, and those charged with governance, about their own identification and assessment of the 
risks of irregularities, including any known actual, suspected or alleged instances of fraud; 
discussed matters about non-compliance with laws and regulations and how fraud might occur including assessment 
of how and where the financial statements may be susceptible to fraud. 

The most significant laws and regulations were determined as follows: 

Legislation / 
Regulation 

IFRS, FRS102 and 
Companies Act 
2006 

Tax compliance 
regulations 

Export Control and 
International 
Traffic in Arms 
(ITAR) 

Health  and  safety 
legislation 

  Additional audit procedures performed by the audit engagement team included:  

 Review  of  the  financial  statement  disclosures  and  testing  to  supporting 
documentation; 

Completion of disclosure checklists to identify areas of non-compliance. 
 Inspection of advice received from external tax advisors; 
Audit of the calculation of the research and development tax allowances to ensure 
suitably supported and in line with legislation.  
 ISAs limit the required audit procedures to identify non-compliance with these laws 
and regulations to inquiry of management and where appropriate, those charged 
with governance. 

 ISAs limit the required audit procedures to identify non-compliance with these laws 
and regulations to inquiry of management and where appropriate, those charged 
with governance. 

67 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
REPORT OF THE INDEPENDENT AUDITORS 
TO THE SHAREHOLDERS OF SOLID STATE PLC (continued) 

The areas that we identified as being susceptible to material misstatement due to fraud were: 

Risk 

Revenue 
recognition 

Management 
override of controls  

  Audit procedures performed by the audit engagement team:  

See key audit matters above.  

Testing the appropriateness of journal entries and other adjustments;  

Assessing  whether  the  judgements  made  in  making  accounting  estimates  are 
indicative of a potential bias; and 

Evaluating the business rationale of any significant transactions that are unusual or 
outside the normal course of business. 

A further description of our responsibilities for the audit of the financial statements is located on the Financial Reporting 
Council’s website at: http://www.frc.org.uk/auditorsresponsibilities. This description forms part of our auditor’s report. 

Use of our report  

This report is made solely to the company’s members, as a body, in accordance with Chapter 3 of Part 16 of the Companies 
Act 2006.  Our audit work has been undertaken so that we might state to the company’s members those matters we are 
required to state to them in an auditor’s report and for no other purpose.  To the fullest extent permitted by law, we do 
not accept or assume responsibility to anyone other than the company and the company’s members as a body, for our 
audit work, for this report, or for the opinions we have formed. 

Ian Wall (Senior Statutory Auditor) 
For and on behalf of RSM UK Audit LLP, Statutory Auditor  
Chartered Accountants 
St Philips Point 
Temple Row 
Birmingham 
B2 5AF 

13 July 2021 

68 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF COMPREHENSIVE INCOME 

        For the year ended 31 March 2021 

Continuing Operations 
Revenue 
Cost of sales 

Gross profit 
Sales, general and administration expenses 

Profit from operations 
Finance expense 

Profit before taxation 
Tax expense 

Adjusted profit after taxation 
Adjustments to profit 
Profit after taxation 

Profit attributable to equity holders of the parent 

Other comprehensive income 

Total comprehensive income for the year 

Earnings per share 
Basic EPS from profit for the year 

Diluted EPS from profit for the year 

Adjusted EPS measures are reported in note 8 to the accounts. 

Notes 
3, 30 

4 
6 

7 

32 

8 

8 

2021 
£’000 
66,281 
(46,362) 
_______ 
19,919 
(15,634) 
_______ 
4,285 
(85) 
_______ 
4,200 
(247) 
_______ 
4,733 
(780) 
3,953 
_______ 
3,953 
_______ 
- 
_______ 
3,953 
_______ 

2021 
46.4p 

45.7p 

2020 
£’000 
67,417 
(46,614) 
_______ 
20,803 
(16,681) 
_______ 
4,122 
(120) 
_______ 
4,002 
(588) 
_______ 
4,002 
(588) 
3,414 
_______ 
3,414 
_______ 
- 
_______ 
3,414 
_______ 

2020 
40.1p 

39.5p 

The notes on pages 75 to 120 form part of these financial statements. 

69 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF CHANGES IN EQUITY 
For the year ended 31 March 2021 

Share 
Capital 
£’000 
427 

Share 
Premium 
Reserve 
£’000 
3,626 

Foreign 
Exchange 
Reserve 
£’000 
(7) 

Capital 
Redemption 
Reserve 
£’000 
5 

Retained 
Earnings 
£’000 
18,521 

Shares 
held in 
Treasury 
£’000 
(43) 

Total 
Equity 
£’000 
22,529 

3,953 

13 

171 

3,953 

- 

171 

- 

- 

- 

- 

(95) 

(95) 

(68) 

68 

- 

(1,069) 

- 

(1,069) 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

13 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

Balance at 31 March 2020 

Total comprehensive income 
for the year ended 31 March 
2021 

Foreign exchange 

Share based payment credit 

Transactions with owners in 
their capacity as owners 

Purchase of treasury shares 

Transfer of treasury shares 
to AESP 

Dividends 

Shares issued 

1 
______ 

(1) 
_______ 

- 
_______ 

- 
_______ 

- 
_______ 

- 
______ 

- 
______ 

Balance at 31 March 2021 

428 
______ 

3,625 
_______ 

6 
_______ 

5 
_______ 

21,508 
_______ 

(70) 
______ 

25,502 
______ 

The notes on pages 75 to 120 form part of these financial statements. 

70 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF CHANGES IN EQUITY 
For the year ended 31 March 2021 

Share 
Capital 
£’000 
427 

Share 
Premium 
Reserve 
£’000 
3,627 

Foreign 
Exchange 
Reserve 
£’000 
(5) 

Capital 
Redemption 
Reserve 
£’000 
5 

Retained 
Earnings 
£’000 
16,021 

Shares 
held in 
Treasury 
£’000 
(172) 

Balance at 31 March 2019 

IFRS16 Leases adjustment 
on adoption 

Total comprehensive income 
for the year ended 31 March 
2020 

Share based payment credit 

Foreign exchange 

Transactions with owners in 
their capacity as owners 

Transfer of treasury shares 
to AESP 

Dividends 

Shares issued 

Rounding  

(1) 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

(2) 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

Total 
Equity 
£’000 
19,903 

(14) 

3,414 

381 

(2) 

- 

(14) 

3,414 

381 

- 

1 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

(129) 

129 

- 

(1,153) 

- 

(1,153) 

1 
______ 

(1) 
_______ 

- 
_______ 

- 
_______ 

- 
_______ 

- 
______ 

- 
______ 

Balance at 31 March 2020 

427 
______ 

3,626 
_______ 

(7) 
_______ 

5 
_______ 

18,521 
_______ 

(43) 
______ 

22,529 
______ 

The notes on pages 75 to 120 form part of these financial statements. 

71 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION 
at 31 March 2021 

Company Number: 00771335 

Notes 

£’000 

£’000 

£’000 

£’000 

2021 

2020 

ASSETS 
NON-CURRENT ASSETS 
Property, plant and equipment 
Right of use lease assets 
Intangible assets 

TOTAL NON-CURRENT ASSETS 

CURRENT ASSETS 
Inventories 
Trade and other receivables 
Deferred tax asset 
Cash and cash equivalents 

TOTAL CURRENT ASSETS 

TOTAL ASSETS 

LIABILITIES 
CURRENT LIABILITIES 
Trade and other payables 
Contract liabilities 
Current borrowings 
Corporation tax liabilities 
Right of use lease liabilities 

TOTAL CURRENT LIABILITIES 

NON CURRENT LIABILITIES 
Non current borrowings 
Right of use lease liabilities 
Provisions 
Deferred tax liability 
Deferred consideration on acquisitions 

TOTAL NON-CURRENT LIABILITIES 

TOTAL LIABILITIES 

NET ASSETS 

10 
11 
12 

15 
16 
23 
22 

17 
18 
19,21,22 

20 

19,21,22 
20 
24 
23 
22 

2,981 
2,476 
16,557 
__________ 

10,629 
14,222 
188 
6,914 
____________, 

11,890 
2,299 
- 
801 
741 
___________ 

3,750 
1,802 
741 
1,491 
4,950 
___________ 

2,286 
1,055 
8,213 
__________ 

22,014 

11,554 

27,124 
___________ 
38,678 
___________ 

31,953 
___________ 
53,967 
___________ 

9,662 
13,859 
86 
3,517 
____________ 

10,597 
2,486 
333 
774 
471 
___________ 

15,731 

14,661 

- 
677 
304 
507 
- 
___________ 

12,734 
____________ 
28,465 
____________ 
25,502 
____________ 

428 
3,625 
5 
6 
21,508 
(70) 
____________ 
25,502 
____________ 

1,488 
____________ 
16,149 
____________ 
22,529 
____________ 

427 
3,626 
5 
(7) 
18,521 
(43) 
____________ 
22,529 
____________ 

CAPITAL AND RESERVES ATTRIBUTABLE TO EQUITY HOLDERS OF THE PARENT 
Share capital 
Share premium reserve 
Capital redemption reserve 
Foreign exchange reserve 
Retained earnings 
Shares held in treasury 

25 
26 
26 
26 
26 
26, 27 

TOTAL EQUITY 

The financial statements were approved by the Board of Directors and authorised for issue on 13 July 2021 and were signed 
on its behalf by:  

G S Marsh, Director      

 P O James, Director   

The notes on pages 75 to 120 form part of these financial statements. 

72 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
        
 
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF CASH FLOWS 
For the year ended 31 March 2021 

OPERATING ACTIVITIES 
Profit before taxation 
Adjustments for: 
Property Plant and equipment depreciation 
Right of use asset depreciation 
Amortisation 
Impairment of right of use asset 
Profit on disposal of property, plant and equipment 
Share based payment expense 
Finance costs 

Profit from operations before changes in working capital and 
provisions 
Decrease in inventories 
Decrease/(increase) in trade and other receivables 
(Decrease)/increase in trade and other payables 
(Decrease)/Increase in provisions 

Cash generated from operations 
Income taxes paid 

Net cash inflow from operating activities 

INVESTING ACTIVITIES 
Purchase of property, plant and equipment 
Capitalised own costs and purchase of intangible assets 
Proceeds of sales from property, plant and equipment 
Payments for acquisition of subsidiaries net of cash acquired  

31 

Net cash outflow from investing activities 

FINANCING ACTIVITIES 
Repurchase of ordinary shares into treasury 
Borrowings drawn 
Borrowings repaid 
Principal payment obligations for right of use assets 
Interest paid 
Dividend paid to equity shareholders 

Net cash inflow/(outflow) from financing activities 

Increase/(decrease) in cash and cash equivalents 

2021 

2020 

£’000 

£’000 

£’000 

£’000 

4,200 

4,002 

614 
497 
978 
- 
(22) 
171 
85 
  _______ 

6,523 

646 
468 
960 
84 
(31) 
381 
120 
  _______ 

6,630 

1,852 
1,925 
(3,363) 
(7) 
_______ 

1 
(444) 
1,801 
54 
  _______ 

407 
  _______ 
6,930 

1,412 
  _______ 
8,042 

(432) 
_______ 

(385) 
  _______ 

(432) 
  _______ 
6,498 

(385) 
  _______ 
7,657 

(356) 
(302) 
77 
(4,119) 
_______ 

(95) 
3,750 
(333) 
(575) 
(37) 
(1,069) 
_______ 

(579) 
(281) 
103 
- 
  _______ 

(4,700) 

(757) 

- 
- 
(5,334) 
(513) 
(80) 
(1,153) 
  _______ 

1,641 
  _______ 
3,439 
  _______ 

(7,080) 
  _______ 
(180) 
  _______ 

The notes on pages 75 to 120 form part of these financial statements. 

73 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF CASH FLOWS 
For the year ended 31 March 2021 (continued) 

Translational foreign exchange on opening cash 
Net increase/(decrease) in cash and cash equivalents 
Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of year 

Cash and cash equivalents at end of year 

2021 
£’000 
(42) 
3,439 
3,517 
_______ 

6,914 
_______ 

There were no significant non-cash transactions. Cash and cash equivalents comprise: 

Cash available on demand 

2021 
£’000 

6,914 
_______ 

2020 
£’000 
5 
(180) 
3,692 
_______ 

3,517 
_______ 

2020 
£’000 

3,517 
_______ 

The notes on pages 75 to 120 form part of these financial statements. 

74 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2021 

1. 

ACCOUNTING POLICIES  

Solid State PLC (“the Company”) is a public company incorporated, domiciled and registered in England and Wales 
in the United Kingdom. The registered number is 00771335 and the registered address is: 2 Ravensbank Business 
Park, Hedera Road, Redditch, B98 9EY. 

Basis of preparation 

The principal accounting policies adopted in the preparation of the financial statements are set out below.  These 
policies have been consistently applied to all the years presented. 

These financial statements have been prepared in accordance with International accounting standards in conformity 
with the requirements of the Companies Act 2006 (“IFRS”).   

The Group financial statements are presented in pounds sterling which is the functional and presentational currency 
of the Group and all values are rounded to the nearest thousand (£’000) except when otherwise indicated. 

Going concern 

In assessing the going concern position of the Group for the Consolidated Financial Statements for the year ended 
31 March 2021, the Directors have considered the Group’s cash flows, liquidity and business activities.  

At  31  March  2021,  the  Group  had  net  cash  at  banks  of  £3.2m  and  an  undrawn  revolving  credit  facility  (RCF)  of 
£3.75m.  

Based  on  the  Group’s  forecasts,  the  Directors  have  adopted  the  going  concern  basis  in  preparing  the  Financial 
Statements. The Directors have made this assessment after consideration of the  Group’s cash flows and related 
assumptions  and  in  accordance  with  the  Guidance  published  by  the  UK  Financial  Reporting  Council  (Risk 
Management, Internal Control and Related Financial and Business Reporting 2014, the April 2016 guidance on Going 
concern basis of accounting and reporting on solvency and liquidity risks and the various guidance issued in 2020). 
This guidance provides support to Directors and Boards in making the assessment of going concern.  

In assessing going concern the Directors have given careful consideration of the potential impact of the on-going 
COVID-19 pandemic and the global electronic component shortages on the cashflows and liquidity of the Group over 
the next 12 month period. 

Throughout the COVID-19 pandemic, and the United Kingdom’s exit from the EU, customer demand has remained 
solid and in recent months we have seen customers extending order cover to help to manage the Global electronics 
supply chain issues. The most significant impact on the Group future performance is the uncertainty arising from the 
extending electronic component lead times. Management have taken all possible actions to minimise and mitigate 
the potential impact of these shortage.  

If the shortages continue into the later part of the financial year 2021/22 as expected the risk does have the potential 
to adversely impact performance. While the actions do not mitigate the risk fully it certainly has significantly reduced 
the risk in the first half of 2021/22 and positions the Group to manage the period beyond as effectively as possible. 

In preparing the going concern assessment the Directors considered the principal risks and uncertainties that the 
business faced which have been disclosed on pages 11 to 15. Three areas have been identified as potentially more 
significant:  direct  supply  chain  disruption  limiting  our  ability  to  supply;  indirect  supply  chain  disruption  delaying 
customer programmes and demand; and a COVID-19 outbreak causing operational disruption. The board concluded 
that the two areas of risk which remained the most uncertain were the direct and indirect supply chain disruption 
risks. 

75 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2021 

1. 

ACCOUNTING POLICIES (continued) 

The Directors have prepared revised “stressed” forecasts taking account of the results to date, current expected 
demand, and mitigating actions which could be taken, together with an assessment of the liquidity headroom against 
the cash and bank facilities.  

The  bank  facilities  are  subject  to  financial  covenants  requiring  the  business  to  be  EBITDA  positive  therefore  this 
facility is available to fund investment in working capital, capital investment or acquisition activities.  

Should the business face such a significant downturn that it was loss making the facility would not be available to be 
drawn  to  fund  additional  losses  without  a  covenant  waiver  or  amendment.  As  a  result,  in  evaluating  a  stressed 
forecast model the Board have not included the RCF in the headroom. 

This financial modelling is based on applying various sensitivity scenarios to a base case to 30 September 2022 which 
has been prepared based on an extension of the budget for FY21/22. 

In the period since the balance sheet date Group like-for-like order intake was up circa 82.5% over the average for 
the prior period albeit the prior period was adversely impacted by the start of the pandemic. The current year order 
intake  is  exceptionally  strong  and  reflects  a  significant  improvement  in  order  cover  which  does  help  to  manage 
extending component lead times.  

In preparing a severe downside scenario with no overhead mitigation, it assumes a shortfall in Group revenue of 
~25% over 12 months period with limited cost mitigation. This results in EBITDA reducing by ~89% compared to the 
Board’s base case expectations. Even with this level of Group EBITDA reductions, when combined with the mitigating 
actions that are within the Group’s control, the Directors currently believe the Group would retain a reasonable cash 
surplus thus maintaining sufficient liquidity to meet its liabilities as they fall due.  

In considering the assessment of the Group’s going concern position the Directors have also identified that the Group 
could look to both the Group’s bankers and or the equity markets if additional liquidity were required. Albeit none 
of the sensitivities indicate that the Group would require additional sources of liquidity. 

In the post balance sheet period, the Group’s cash generation has been strong and the completion payments on the 
acquisitions of £2.6m have been funded out of cash generation in the period. 

The  Directors  have  concluded  that  the  potential  impact  of  the  electronic  component  shortages  and  COVID-19 
pandemic  described  above  does  not  represent  a  material  uncertainty  over  the  Group  and  Company’s  ability  to 
continue as a going concern. Nevertheless, it is acknowledged that there are potentially material variations in the 
forecasted level of financial performance for the coming year. 

The  Directors  have  a  reasonable  expectation  that  the  Group  has  adequate  resources  to  continue  in  operational 
existence for the next 12 months, therefore it is appropriate to adopt a going concern basis for the preparation of 
the Financial Statements. Accordingly, these financial statements do not include any adjustments to the carrying 
amount or classification of assets and liabilities that would result if the Group and Company were unable to continue 
as a going concern.  

76 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2021  

1. 

ACCOUNTING POLICIES (continued) 

Changes in accounting policy and disclosures 

New standards, amendments and interpretations adopted in the year. 

The following new standards, amendments and interpretations have been adopted by the Group for the first time 
for the financial year beginning on the 1 April 2020: 

•  Amendments to IFRS 3, ‘Business combinations’, – Definition of a business 

•  Amendments  to  IAS  1  -  Presentation  of  financial  statements  and  IAS  8  Accounting  policies  changes  in 
accounting estimates and errors which are intended to make the definition of material easier to understand. 

•  Amendments to IFRS 9, IAS 39 and IFRS 17: – Interest rate benchmark reform. 

•  Amendment to IFRS16 in relation to COVID-19 related rent concessions beyond 30 June 2021. 

•  Amendments to the Conceptual framework. 

The adoption of these standards and amendments has not had a material impact on the financial statements. 

New standards, amendments and interpretations to published standards issued but not yet effective and not early 
adopted 

A number of new standards, amendments and interpretations to existing standards have been published that will 
be mandatory for the Group’s accounting periods beginning on or after 1 April 2021 or later periods and which the 
Group  has  decided  not  to adopt  early  are  listed  below.  The  Group  intends  to  adopt  these  standards  when  they 
become effective. 

• 

IFRS  17  Insurance  contracts  which  establishes  the  principles  for  the  recognition,  measurement, 
presentation and disclosure of insurance contracts and supersedes IFRS 4. 

•  Amendments to IFRS 10 Consolidated financial statements and IAS 28 investments in associates and joint 
ventures which clarifies the accounting treatment for sales or contribution of assets between an investor 
and its associate or joint venture. 

•  Amendments to references to the Conceptual framework in IFRS Standards. 

The Directors anticipate that none of the new standards, amendments to standards and interpretations will have a 
significant effect on the financial statements of the Group. 

Principle of consolidation 

The consolidated financial statements incorporate the financial results and position of the Parent and its subsidiaries. 

Subsidiaries  are  all  entities  over  which  the  Group  has  control.  The  Group  controls  an  entity  when  the  Group  is 
exposed to, or has rights to, variable returns from its involvement with the entity and has the ability to affect those 
returns through its power to direct the activities of the entity.  

Subsidiaries  are  fully  consolidated  from  the  date  on  which  control  is  transferred  to  the  Group.  They  are 
deconsolidated  from  the  date  that  control  ceases.  The  acquisition  method  of  accounting  is  used  to  account  for 
business combinations by the Group. 

Intercompany  transactions,  balances  and  unrealised  gains  on  transactions  between  Group  companies  are 
eliminated. Unrealised losses are also eliminated unless the transaction provides evidence of an impairment of the 
transferred asset. Accounting policies of subsidiaries have been changed where necessary to ensure consistency 
with the policies adopted by the Group. 

Non-controlling interests in the results and equity of subsidiaries are shown separately in the consolidated statement 
of  comprehensive  income,  consolidated  statement  of  changes  in  equity  and  consolidated  statement  of  financial 
position respectively. 

77 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

For the year ended 31 March 2021 

1. 

ACCOUNTING POLICIES (continued) 

Business combinations 

The purchase method of accounting is used to account for all business combinations, regardless of whether equity 
instruments or other assets are acquired. Acquisition-related costs are expensed as incurred. 

The consideration transferred for the acquisition of a subsidiary comprises the: fair values of the assets transferred; 
liabilities incurred to the former owners of the acquired business; equity interests issued by the Group; fair value of 
any asset or liability resulting from a contingent consideration arrangement; and fair value of any pre-existing equity 
interest in the subsidiary. 

Identifiable assets acquired, and liabilities and contingent liabilities assumed in a business combination are, with 
limited  exceptions, measured initially at their fair values at the acquisition date. The  Group recognises any non-
controlling interest in the acquired entity on an acquisition-by-acquisition basis either at fair value or at the non-
controlling interest’s proportionate share of the acquired entity’s net identifiable assets. 

The  excess  of  the:  consideration  transferred;  amount  of  any  non-controlling  interest  in  the  acquired  entity;  and 
acquisition-date  fair  value  of  any  previous  equity  interest  in  the  acquired  entity,  over  the  fair  value  of  the  net 
identifiable assets acquired, is recorded as goodwill.  

If those amounts are less than the fair value of the net identifiable assets of the business acquired, the difference is 
recognised directly in profit or loss as a bargain purchase. Where settlement of any part of cash consideration is 
deferred, the amounts payable in the future are discounted to their present value as at the date of exchange. The 
discount rate used is the entity’s incremental borrowing rate, being the rate at which a similar borrowing could be 
obtained from an independent financier under comparable terms and conditions. 

Contingent consideration is classified either as equity or a financial liability. Amounts classified as a financial liability 
are subsequently remeasured to fair value with changes in fair value recognised in profit or loss. 

If the business combination is achieved in stages, the acquisition date carrying value of the acquirer’s previously held 
equity interest in the acquiree is remeasured to fair value at the acquisition date. Any gains or losses arising from 
such remeasurement are recognised in profit or loss. 

Impairment of non-financial assets 

Non financial assets that have an indefinite useful life (e.g. Goodwill) or other intangible assets which are not ready 
to use and therefore not subject to amortisation (e.g. on going incomplete R&D programmes) are reviewed at least 
annually for impairment. 

Impairment tests on goodwill are undertaken annually on 31 March, and on other non-financial assets whenever 
events or changes in circumstances indicate that their carrying value may not be reasonable. Where the carrying 
value of an asset exceeds its recoverable amount (i.e. the higher of value in use and fair value less costs to sell), the 
asset is written down accordingly. 

Impairment charges are included in sales, general and administration expenses in the consolidated statement of 
comprehensive  income,  except  to  the  extent  that  they  reverse  gains  previously  recognised  in  the  consolidated 
statement of recognised income and expense. An impairment loss recognised for goodwill is not reversed. 

78 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2021 

1. 

ACCOUNTING POLICIES (continued) 

Intangible Assets 

a) Goodwill 

Goodwill arising on an acquisition is recognised as an asset and initially measured at cost, being the excess of the 
fair  value  of  the  consideration  over  the  fair  value  of  the  identifiable  assets,  liabilities  and  contingent  liabilities 
acquired. Goodwill is not amortised. However,  it is reviewed for potential impairment  at least annually or more 
frequently  if  events  or  circumstances  indicate  a  potential  impairment.  For  the  purpose  of  impairment  testing, 
goodwill is allocated to each of the Cash Generating Units to which is relates. Any impairment identified is charged 
directly  to  consolidated  statement  of  comprehensive  income.  Subsequent  reversals  of  impairment  losses  for 
goodwill are not recognised. 

b) Development costs 

Expenditure incurred that is directly attributable to the development of new or substantially improved products or 
processes is recognised as an intangible asset when the following criteria are met: 

• 
• 
• 
• 
• 
• 

the product or process is intended for use or sale; 
the development is technically feasible to complete; 
there is an ability to use or sell the product or process; 
it can be demonstrated how the product or process will generate probable future economic benefits; 
there are adequate technical, financial and other resources to complete the development; and 
the development expenditure can be reliably measured. 

Directly attributable costs refers to the materials consumed; the directly attributable labour; and the incremental 
overheads incurred in the development activity. General operating costs, administration costs and selling costs do 
not form part of directly attributable costs.  

All research and other development costs are expensed as incurred.  

Capitalised development costs are amortised on a straight line basis over the period, during which the economic 
benefits are expected to be received, which typically range between 1 and 5 years. Amortisation expense is included 
within sales, general and administration expenses in the statement of comprehensive income. 

The estimated remaining useful lives of development costs are reviewed at least on an annual basis. Amortisation 
commences once the project is completed and revenues are being generated.  

The carrying value of capitalised development costs is reviewed for potential impairment at least annually, or more 
frequently  if  events  or  circumstances  indicate  a  potential  impairment.  Any  impairment  identified  is  immediately 
charged to the consolidated statement of comprehensive income.  

c) Software 

Externally acquired software assets are initially recognised at cost and subsequently amortised on a straight-line 
basis over their useful economic lives. Cost includes all directly attributable costs of acquisition. In addition, directly 
attributable costs incurred in the development of bespoke software for the Group’s own use are capitalised.  

The useful economic life over which the software is being amortised has been assessed to be 3 to 5 years. 

The  carrying  value  of  capitalised  software  costs  is  reviewed  for  potential  impairment  at  least  annually,  or  more 
frequently  if  events  or  circumstances  indicate  a  potential  impairment.  Any  impairment  identified  is  immediately 
charged to the consolidated statement of comprehensive income.  

The costs of maintaining internally developed software, and annual licence fees to utilise third party software, are 
expensed as incurred. 

79 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2021 

1. 

ACCOUNTING POLICIES (continued) 

Intangible Assets (continued)  

d) Other intangibles 

Other intangible assets are those which arise on business combinations in accordance with IFRS 3 revised. These 
intangible assets form part of the identifiable net assets of an acquired business and are recognised at their fair value 
and amortised on a systematic basis over their useful economic life which is typically 5 to 10 years. This includes 
customer relationships, the fair value of which has been evaluated using the multi period excess earnings method 
“MEEM”.  

The MEEM model valuation was cross checked to the cost of product development and customer qualification to 
which the relationships relate.  

Capitalised acquisition intangibles are amortised on a straight line basis over the period, during which the economic 
benefits  are  expected  to  be  received,  which  typically  range  between  5  and  10  years.  Amortisation  expense  is 
included within sales, general and administration expenses in the statement of comprehensive income. 

The  carrying  value  of  other  intangible  assets  is  reviewed  for  potential  impairment  at  least  annually,  or  more 
frequently  if  events  or  circumstances  indicate  a  potential  impairment.  Any  impairment  identified  is  immediately 
charged to the consolidated statement of comprehensive income. 

Property, plant and equipment 

Property,  plant  and  equipment  is  stated  at  historical  cost  or  deemed  cost  where  IFRS  1  exemptions  have  been 
applied, less accumulated depreciation and any recognised impairment losses. 

Costs include the original purchase price of the asset and the costs attributable to bringing the asset to its working 
condition for its intended use including any qualifying finance expenses. 

Depreciation is provided on all items of property, plant and equipment to write off the carrying value of items over 
their expected useful economic lives.  It is applied at the following rates: 

• Short leasehold property improvements- straight line over minimum life of lease 
• Fittings and equipment- 25% per annum on a reducing balance basis or a straight line basis over 3 to 5 years 

with an appropriate residual value as considered most appropriate  
• Computers- between 20% and 33.3% per annum on a straight-line basis 
• Motor vehicles- 25% per annum on a reducing balance basis 

The residual values and useful lives of the assets are reviewed, and adjusted if appropriate, at each balance sheet 
date. An asset’s carrying amount is written down immediately to its recoverable amount if its carrying amount is 
greater than its estimated net realisable value. Gains and losses on disposal are determined by comparing proceeds 
with carrying amounts. These are included in the consolidated statement of comprehensive income. 

Leases 

IFRS 16 “Leases” addresses the definition of a lease, the recognition and measurement of leases and establishes the 
principles for the reporting useful information to users of the financial statements about the leasing activities of 
both lessees and lessors. 

The Group has applied judgement to determine the lease term for some lease contracts in which as lessee there 
includes  a  renewal  option.  The  assessment  of  whether  the  Group  is  reasonably  certain  to  exercise  such  options 
impacts the lease term, which affects the amount of lease liabilities and right-of-use assets recognised. 

The lease liability reflects the present value of the future rental payments and interest, discounted using either the 
effective interest rate or the incremental borrowing rate of the entity. 

Payments associated with short-term leases and leases of low value assets are recognised on a straight-line basis 
over the lease term as an expense within the income statement.  

80 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2021  

1. 

ACCOUNTING POLICIES (continued) 

Leases (continued) 

Solid State PLC adopted IFRS16 using the modified retrospective transition approach, with the cumulative effect 
of adopting the new standard being recognised in equity as an adjustment to the opening balance of retained 
earnings for the previous period. 

On adoption of IFRS 16 the Group used the following practical expedients permitted by the standards: 

• 
• 
• 

applying a single discount rate to a portfolio of leases with reasonably similar characteristics 
excluding initial direct costs for the measurement of the right of use asset at the date of initial adoption 
accounting for leases with a term ending within 12 months of the date of initial application in the same 
way as short-term leases. 

Right-of-use assets 

The Group recognises right-of-use assets at the commencement date of the lease (i.e., the date the underlying 
asset  is  available  for  use).  Right-of-use  assets  are  measured  at  cost,  less  any  accumulated  depreciation  and 
impairment  losses  and  adjusted  for  any  remeasurement  of  lease  liabilities.  The  cost  of  right-of-use  assets 
includes the amount of lease liabilities recognised, initial direct costs incurred, and lease payments made at or 
before  the  commencement  date  less  any  lease  incentives  received.  Right-of-use  assets  are  related  to  the 
property leases, plant and machinery and motor vehicles and are depreciated on a straight-line basis over the 
lease term. 

Right of use lease liabilities 

At the commencement date of the lease, the Group recognises lease liabilities measured at the present value of 
lease  payments  to  be  made  over  the  lease  term.  The  lease  payments  include  lease  payments  less  any  lease 
incentives  receivable.  In  calculating  the  present  value  of  lease  payments,  the  Group  uses  its  incremental 
borrowing rate at the lease commencement date because the interest rate implicit in the lease is not readily 
determinable.  

After the commencement date, the amount of lease liabilities is increased to reflect the accretion of interest and 
reduced for the lease payments made. In addition, the carrying amount of lease liabilities is remeasured if there 
is a modification, a change in the lease term or a change in the lease payments (e.g., changes to future payments 
resulting from a change in an index or rate used to determine such lease payments). 

Inventories 

Inventories are stated at the lower of cost and net realisable value. Cost is based on either average purchase cost 
or the cost of purchase on a first in, first out basis which is the most appropriate for the category of inventory. 
Work in progress and finished goods include labour and attributable overheads.  Net realisable value is based on 
estimated selling price less any additional costs to completion and disposal. 

Financial Instruments  

Classification and measurement of financial instruments under IFRS9 classifies financial assets as either held at 
amortised  cost,  fair  value  through  other  comprehensive  income  (FVOCI)  or  fair  value  through  profit  or  loss, 
dependent on the business model and cash flow characteristics of the financial instrument. 

Financial  assets  and  financial  liabilities  are  recognised  when  the  company  becomes  party  to  the  contractual 
provisions of the instrument. 

Trade and other receivables 

Trade receivables are initially measured at their transaction price. Other receivables are initially recognised at 
fair value plus transaction costs. 

Receivables are held to collect the contractual cash flows which are solely payments of principal and interest. 
Therefore,  these  receivables  are  subsequently  measured  at  amortised  cost  using  the  effective  interest  rate 
method. 

The effect of discounting on these financial instruments is not considered to be material. 

81 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2021 

1. 

ACCOUNTING POLICIES (continued) 

Cash and cash equivalents 

Cash and cash equivalents include cash at bank and in hand and highly liquid interest-bearing securities with 
maturities of  three  months  or  less. Bank  overdrafts  are shown  within borrowings  in  current  liabilities  on  the 
balance sheet. 

Impairment of financial assets 

IFRS 9 requires an expected credit loss (‘ECL’) model which broadens the information that an entity is required 
to  consider  when  determining  its  expectations  of  impairment.  Under  this  new  model, expectations  of  future 
events must be taken into account and this will result in the earlier recognition of potential impairments. 

An impairment loss is recognised for the expected credit losses on financial assets when there is an increased 
probability  that  the  counterparty  will  be  unable  to  settle  an  instrument’s  contractual  cash  flows  on  the 
contractual due dates, a reduction in the amounts expected to be recovered, or both. 

The probability of default and expected amounts recoverable are assessed using reasonable and supportable 
past and forward-looking information that is available without undue cost or effort.  The expected credit loss is 
a probability-weighted amount determined from a range of outcomes and takes into account the time value of 
money. 

Impairment of trade receivables 

For trade receivables, expected credit losses are measured by applying an expected loss rate to the gross carrying 
amount.  The expected loss rate comprises the risk of a default occurring and the expected cash flows on default 
based on the aging of the receivable.   

The risk of a default occurring always takes into consideration all possible default events over the expected life 
of those receivables (“the lifetime expected credit losses”). Different provision rates and periods are used based 
on groupings of historic credit loss experience by product type, customer type and location. 

Impairment of other receivables 

The  measurement  of 
‘performing’, 
‘underperforming’ or ‘non-performing’ based on the company’s assessment of increases in the credit risk of the 
financial asset since its initial recognition and any events that have occurred before the year-end which have a 
detrimental impact on cash flows. 

losses  depends  on  whether  the  financial  asset 

impairment 

is 

The financial asset moves from ‘performing’ to ‘underperforming’ when the increase in credit risk since initial 
recognition becomes significant. 

In assessing whether credit risk has increased significantly, the company compares the risk of default at the year-
end with the risk of a default when the investment was originally recognised using reasonable and supportable 
past and forward-looking information that is available without undue cost. 

The risk of a default occurring takes into consideration default events that are possible within 12 months of the 
year-end (“the 12-month expected credit losses”) for ‘performing’ financial assets, and all possible default events 
over the expected life of those receivables (“the lifetime expected credit losses”) for ‘underperforming’ financial 
assets. 

Impairment losses and any subsequent reversals of impairment losses are adjusted against the carrying amount 
of the receivable and are recognised in profit or loss. 

82 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2021 

1. 

ACCOUNTING POLICIES (continued) 

Financial Liabilities and equity 

Financial  liabilities  and  equity  instruments  are  classified  according  to  the  substance  of  the  contractual 
arrangements entered into. 

An  equity  instrument  is  any  contract  that  evidences  a  residual  interest  in  the  assets  of  the  company  after 
deducting all of its liabilities. 

Financial liabilities are classified as either: 

• 
• 

Financial liabilities at amortised cost; or 
Financial liabilities as at fair value through profit or loss (FVTPL). 

All financial liabilities are measured at amortised cost and include: 

Trade and other payables 
Contract liabilities 

• 
• 
•  Borrowings 
• 

Lease liabilities 

Trade payables 

Trade payables are obligations to pay for goods or services that have been acquired in the ordinary course of 
business from suppliers. 

Accounts payable are classified as current liabilities if payment is due within one year or less (or in the normal 
operating cycle of the business if longer). If not, they are presented as non-current liabilities.  

They are initially recognised at fair value net of direct transaction costs and subsequently held at amortised cost. 

Contract liabilities 

Contract liabilities comprise payments in advance of revenue recognition and revenue deferred due to contract 
performance obligation not being completed.  

They are classified as current liabilities if the contract performance obligations payment are due to be completed 
within one year or less (or in the normal operating cycle of the business if longer). If not, they are presented as 
noncurrent liabilities.  

Contract liabilities are recognised initially at fair value, and subsequently stated at amortised cost. 

Borrowings 

Borrowings  are  recognised  initially  at  fair  value,  net  of  transaction  costs  incurred  and  subsequently stated  at 
amortised cost. Borrowing costs are expensed using the effective interest method. 

Equity instruments and Share capital 

Ordinary shares are classified as equity.  

Incremental costs directly attributable to the issue of new shares or options are shown in equity as a deduction, 
net of tax, from the proceeds. 

Treasury Shares 

Where  any  Group  company  purchases  the  Parent  Company’s  equity  share  capital  (treasury  shares),  the 
consideration paid, including any directly attributable incremental costs (net of income taxes), is deducted from 
equity attributable to the Company’s equity holders until the shares are cancelled, reissued or disposed of. 

These  shares  are  held  in  a  separate  negative  reserve  in  the  capital  section  of  the  consolidated  statement  of 
financial position. Any dividends payable in relation to these shares are cancelled. 

Where such shares are subsequently sold or reissued, any consideration received, net of any directly attributable 
incremental  transaction  costs  and  the  related  income  tax  effects,  is  included  in  equity  attributable  to  the 
Company’s equity holders. 

83 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2021 

1. 

ACCOUNTING POLICIES (continued) 

Dividends 

Equity dividends are recognised when they become legally payable. Interim dividends are recognised when paid. 
Final dividends are recognised when approved by the shareholders at an annual general meeting. 

Exceptional items 

Exceptional items are disclosed separately in the financial statements where it is necessary to do so to provide 
further  understanding  of  the  financial  performance  of  the  Group.  Transactions  are  classified  as  exceptional 
where they relate to an event that falls outside of the ordinary activities of the business and where individually 
or in aggregate, they have a material impact on the financial statements.  

Foreign currency 

Transactions  entered  into  by  Group  entities  in  a  currency  other  than  the  currency  of  the  primary  economic 
environment in which it operates are recorded at the rates ruling when the transactions occur.  Foreign currency 
monetary  assets  and  liabilities  are  retranslated  at  the  rates  ruling  at  the  balance  sheet  date.    Exchange 
differences arising are recognised in the statement of comprehensive income. 

Revenue  

The Group manufactures and distributes a range of electronic equipment. Revenue comprises sales to external 
customers after discounts, excluding value added taxes. 

The Group’s performance obligations with respect to physical goods is to deliver a finished product to a customer. 

Revenue is recognised when control of the products has transferred, being when the products are delivered to 
the customer, the customer has full control over the products supplied, and there is no unfulfilled obligation that 
could affect the customer’s acceptance of the products.  

Delivery occurs when the products have been shipped to the specific location, the risks of obsolescence and loss 
have been transferred to the customer, and either the customer has accepted the products in accordance with 
the sales contract, the acceptance provisions have lapsed, or the Group has objective evidence that all criteria 
for acceptance have been satisfied. 

Where  performance  obligations  have  not  be  satisfied  at  the  reporting  date  any  advanced  payments  are 
recognised as contract liabilities. 

For goods that are subject to bill and hold arrangements this means: 

• 
• 

the goods are complete and ready for collection; 
the  goods  are  separately  identified  from  the  Group’s  other  stock  and  are  not  used  to  fulfil  any  other 
orders;  

•  and the customer has specifically requested that the goods be held pending collection. 

Normal payment terms apply to the bill and hold arrangements. 

Revenue is only recognised to the extent that it is highly probable that a significant reversal will not occur.  

No element of financing is deemed present as the sales are made with a credit term of 30 to 90 days, which is 
consistent with market practice. The Group does not expect to have any contracts where the period between 
the transfer of the promised goods or services to the customer and payment by the customer exceeds one year. 
As a consequence, the Group does not adjust any of the transaction prices for the time value of money. 

The Group’s obligation to provide a refund for faulty products under the standard warranty terms is recognised 
as a returns provision. A receivable is recognised when the goods are delivered as this is the point in time that 
the consideration is unconditional because only the passage of time is required before the payment is due. 

84 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2021  

1. 

ACCOUNTING POLICIES (continued) 

Segmental reporting 

Operating segments are reported in a manner consistent with the internal reporting provided to the Executive 
Directors, who are responsible for allocating resources and assessing performance of the operating segments.  

A business segment is a group of assets and operations engaged in providing products or services that are subject 
to risks and returns that are different from those of other business segments.  

A geographical segment is engaged in providing products or services within a particular economic environment 
that  are  subject  to  risks  and  returns  that  are  different  from  those  of  segments  operating  in  other  economic 
environments.  

The Executive Directors assess the performance of the operating segments based on the measures of revenue, 
Profit Before Taxation (PBT) and Profit After Taxation (PAT). Central overheads are not allocated to the business 
segments. 

Government Grants 

Income  received  from  government  grants  is  recognised  as  ‘Other  Income’  within  operating  profit  in  the 
Statement  of  Comprehensive  Income  in  the  same  period  as  the  staff  costs  to  which  the  income  relates. 
Government grant income is only recognised once there is reasonable assurance both that the Group will comply 
with any conditions and that the grant will be received. The Group utilised the UK Government‘s Coronavirus Job 
Retention Scheme, ‘furlough scheme’, during the COVID-19 pandemic.  

Pensions  

The  pension  schemes  operated  by  the  Group  are  defined  contribution  schemes.  The  pension  cost  charge 
represents the contributions payable by the Group.  

Current and deferred taxation 

Income tax on the profit or loss for the year comprises current and deferred tax. 

Taxable profit differs from accounting profit because it excludes certain items of income and expense that are 
recognised in the financial statements but are treated differently for tax purposes. Current tax is the amount of 
tax expected to be payable or receivable on the taxable profit or loss for the current period. This amount is then 
amended for any adjustments in respect of prior periods. 

Current  tax  is  calculated  using  tax  rates  that  have  been  written  into  law  (‘enacted’)  or  irrevocably 
announced/committed by the respective Government (‘substantively enacted’) at the period-end date. Current 
tax receivable (assets) and payable (liabilities) are offset only when there is a legal right to settle them net and 
the entity intends to do so. This is generally true when the taxes are levied by the same tax authority. 

Because of the differences between accounting and taxable profits and losses reported in each period, temporary 
differences arise on the amount certain assets and liabilities are carried at for accounting purposes and their 
respective tax values. Deferred tax is the amount of tax payable or recoverable on these temporary differences. 

Deferred tax assets and liabilities are recognised where the carrying amount of an asset or liability in the balance 
sheet differs from its tax base, except for differences arising on: 

• 
• 

• 

the initial recognition of goodwill 
the initial recognition of an asset or liability in a transaction which is not a business combination and at 
the time of the transaction affects neither accounting nor taxable profit: and 
investments in subsidiaries and jointly controlled entities where the Group is able to control the timing 
of the reversal of the difference and it is probable the difference will not reverse in the foreseeable 
future. 

85 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2021 

1. 

ACCOUNTING POLICIES (continued) 

Current and deferred taxation (continued)  

Recognition of deferred tax assets is restricted to those instances where it is probable that taxable profit will be 
available against which the differences can be utilised. 

The amount of the asset or liability is determined using tax rates that have been enacted or substantively enacted 
by  the  balance  sheet  date  and  are  expected  to  apply  when  the  deferred  tax  liabilities/(assets)  are 
settled/(recovered). 

Deferred tax assets and liabilities are offset when the Group has a legally enforceable right to offset current tax 
assets and liabilities, and the deferred tax assets and liabilities relate to taxes levied by the same tax authority. 

Share based payment 

Where share options are awarded to employees, the fair value of the options at the date of grant is charged to 
the consolidated statement of comprehensive income over the vesting period.  Non-market vesting conditions 
are taken into account by adjusting the number of equity instruments expected to vest at each statement of 
financial position date so that, ultimately, the cumulative amount recognised over the vesting period is based on 
the number of options that eventually vest. Market vesting conditions are factored into the fair value of options 
granted. As long as all other vesting conditions are satisfied, a charge is made irrespective of whether the market 
vesting conditions are satisfied. The cumulative expense is not adjusted for failure to achieve a market vesting 
condition. 

Where the terms and conditions of options are modified before they vest, the increase in the fair value of the 
options, measured immediately before and after the modification, is also charged to the consolidated statement 
of comprehensive income over the remaining vesting period. 

86 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2021 

2. 

CRITICAL ACCOUNTING ESTIMATES AND JUDGEMENTS 

The preparation of financial statements requires the use of accounting estimates which, by definition, will seldom 
equal  the  actual  results.  Management  also  needs  to  exercise  judgement  in  applying  the  Group’s  accounting 
policies. This note provides an overview of the areas that involved a higher degree of judgement or complexity, 
and of items which are more likely to be materially adjusted due to estimates and assumptions turning out to be 
wrong.  

Acquisition accounting  

In accounting for the acquisitions in accordance with IFRS 3 the key judgements relate to the fair value of the 
deferred  contingent  consideration  and  the  fair  value  of  the  intangible  assets.  The  deferred  contingent 
consideration has been recognised at £4.95m and the fair value of the intangible assets recognised is £5.4m. The 
intangible assets have been recognised based on a Multi-Period Excess Earnings Method (MEEM) model. See 
note 12 and note 31 for further detailed disclosures.  

Expected credit losses  

In accordance with IFRS 9 the Group is required to make an assessment of the expected credit loss occurring over 
the life of its trade receivables. As a result of the COVID-19 disruption to businesses across the globe the Directors 
expect that the risk of credit default has significantly increased over historical norms.  

As a result, the Directors have made a judgemental assessment of the potential increase in credit losses in the 
current business environment. In these financial statements the Directors have provided full disclosures of the 
provisions for credit default in note 21. 

The increase in the provision based on the Directors judgemental assessment of expected credit loss reflects an 
increase of £0.15m to £0.65m. The increase in the year is significant but not considered material to the financial 
statements as a whole. 

Estimated useful life of research and development and intangible assets arising on acquisitions 

The  periods  of  amortisation  adopted  to  write  down  capitalised  product  and  process  development  requires 
estimates to be made in respect of the useful economic lives of the intangible assets to determine an appropriate 
amortisation rate.  

Capitalised development costs are amortised over the period during which economic benefits are expected to 
be received which is typically 1 – 5 years. Intangible assets arising on acquisitions are amortised straight line over 
the period during which economic benefits are expected to be received which is typically 5 – 10 years. 

The amortisation charge for capitalised development costs in the current year is £250k; if the lives were reduced 
by one year across all the projects which are being amortised the charge would increase by circa £100k.  

The amortisation charge for intangible assets arising on acquisitions in the current year is £680k; if the lives were 
reduced by one year the charge would increase by £51k.  

Recognition criteria for capitalisation of development expenditure 

The Group capitalises R&D in accordance with IAS 38. There is judgement in respect of when R&D projects meet 
the requirement for capitalisation, which internal costs are directly attributable and therefore appropriate to 
capitalise and when the development programme is complete, and capitalisation should cease.  

Amounts  capitalised  include  the  total  cost  of  any  external  products  or  services  and  labour  costs  directly 
attributable  to  the  development  programme.  Management  judgement  is  involved  in  determining  the 
appropriate internal costs to capitalise and the amounts involved. 

If there is any uncertainty in terms of the technical feasibility, ability to sell the product or any other risk that 
means the programme does not meet the requirements of the standard the R&D costs are expensed within the 
consolidated statement of comprehensive income.  

87 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2021 

2. 

CRITICAL ACCOUNTING ESTIMATES AND JUDGEMENTS – (Continued) 

Estimation of level of R&D expenditure which is eligible for R&D tax credits under the SME and large 
company scheme. 

Uncertainties exist in relation to the interpretation of complex tax legislation, changes in tax laws and the amount 
and timing of future taxable income. This could necessitate future adjustments to taxable income and expense 
already recorded.  

At the year-end date, tax liabilities and assets reflect management’s judgements in respect of the application of 
the tax regulations, in particular the R&D tax. 

In assessing our year-end corporation tax liability, we have made a provisional assessment as to the likely amount 
of development expenditure  that will be eligible under each of the HMRCs large company and SME R&D tax 
credit schemes as the detailed tax computations have not been completed.  

Our judgement at year end assumed that the level of eligible spend was comparable with prior years. At 31 March 
2021 there are current and deferred tax provisions totalling approximately £2.1m.  

Due to the uncertainties noted above, it is possible that the Group’s initial estimates are different to the final 
position adopted when the tax computation is finalised, resulting in a different tax payable or recoverable from 
the amounts provided. 

Provisions for slow moving or obsolete inventories 

Inventories are carried at the lower of cost and net realisable value (NRV). NRV is reviewed in detail on an on-
going  basis  and  provision  for  obsolete  inventory  is  made  based  on  a  number  of  factors  including  age  of 
inventories, the risk of technical obsolescence and the expected future usage.  

Differences between such estimates and actual market conditions may have a material impact on the amount of 
the carrying value of inventories and may result in adjustments to cost of sales. See note 15 for details of the 
inventory provisions and the amounts written off to consolidated statement of comprehensive income in the 
year.   

88 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2021 

3. 

REVENUE 

The Group derives revenue from the transfer of goods at a point in time in the following major product lines and 
geographical regions:  

United Kingdom 
Rest of Europe 
Asia 
North America 
Rest of World 

Total revenue 

Computing products 
Communications products 
Power products 
Opto electronic and electronic components and modules 

Total revenue 

See further segmental disclosures in note 30. 

2021 
£’000 

46,301 
7,349 
3,342 
9,148 
141 
_______ 

66,281 
_______ 

2021 
£’000 

10,643 
5,678 
10,978 
38,982 
_______ 

66,281 
_______ 

2020 
£’000 

48,596 
6,885 
4,416 
7,235 
285 
_______ 

67,417 
_______ 

2020 
£’000 

10,267 
5,292 
12,611 
39,247 
_______ 

67,417 
_______ 

89 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2021 

4. 

PROFIT FROM OPERATIONS 

This has been arrived at after charging/(crediting): 

Continuing charges /(credits) 
Staff costs excluding share based payments (see note 5) 
Share based payment expenses 
Depreciation of property, plant and equipment 
Depreciation of right of use asset 
Impairment of right of use asset 
Amortisation of intangible assets 
Profit on disposal of property, plant and equipment 
Auditors’ remuneration: 

Audit fees 
Other assurance fees 
Non audit fees: 
Corporate finance services 
Other advisory services 

2021 
£’000 

11,656 
171 
614 
497 
- 
978 
(26) 

123 
- 

2020 
£’000 

11,386 
381 
646 
468 
84 
960 
31 

75 
1 

Research and development costs (includes relevant staff costs) 
Foreign exchange expense/ (credit) 
Stock write (backs)/downs 
Acquisition of subsidiaries legal and due diligence * 
Other Income from government grants (furlough scheme) 

9 
18 
1,350 
(277) 
(111) 
- 
- 
_______ 
The foreign exchange differences have been treated as an adjustment to cost of sales rather than as an overhead 
as they arise from sales income and cost of sales expenditures. 

48 
3 
1,664 
564 
(5) 
194 
(297) 
_______ 

Details  of  transactions  with  businesses  associated  with  the  Directors  are  included  within  the  Directors’ 
remuneration report on pages 44 to 57. 

As set out in the audit committee report the UK trading subsidiaries (excepting Active Silicon Limited and Willow 
Technologies Limited) are exempt from the requirements to have an audit and file audited financial statements 
by virtue of section 479A of the Companies Act 2006. In adopting the exemption Solid State PLC has provided a 
statutory guarantee to these subsidiaries in accordance with section 479C of the Companies Act 2006. 

*  Includes  the  £48k  corporate  finance  fees  from  the  Group  auditors  as  disclosed  and  £155k  from  other 
professional services firms. 

90 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2021  

5. 

STAFF COSTS 

Staff costs for all employees during the year, including the Executive Directors, were as follows: 

Wages and salaries 
Social security costs 
Other pension costs 
Share based payment charges 

Total staff costs 

2021 
£’000 

9,751 
1,012 
893 
171 
_______ 

11,827 
_______ 

2020 
£’000 

9,344 
1,223 
819 
381 
_______ 

11,767 
_______ 

Wages and salaries include termination costs of £69k (2020: £47k). 

The average monthly number of employees during the year, including the Executive Directors, was as follows: 

Selling and distribution 
Manufacturing and assembly 
Management and administration 

2021 
Number 

112 
103 
30 
_______ 

245 
_______ 

2020 
Number 

114 
104 
38 
_______ 

256 
_______ 

Key management in the prior year was considered to be Group Board Directors. Therefore, the key compensation 
is disclosed in the Remuneration Committee Report on pages 44 to 57 which includes Director’s emoluments, 
interests, and services contracts.  

In the current year a formalised senior management team has been formed and included with the  Company 
Share  Option  Plan.  This  senior  management  team  is  the  key  management  team  for  2021.  The  total  key 
management compensation including employers NI totals £2,981k (2020: £1,495k). 

6. 

FINANCE EXPENSE 

Bank borrowings 
Interest on lease liabilities 

Total finance expense 

2021 
£’000 

37 
48 
______ 

85 
______ 

2020 
£’000 

80 
40 
______ 

120 
______ 

91 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2021 

7. 

TAX EXPENSE 

Analysis of continuing total tax expense 

Total tax charge from continuing operations 

Current tax expense 

UK corporation tax on profits for the year 
Adjustment in respect of prior periods 

Deferred tax credit 

2021 
£’000 

2020 
£’000 

247 
_______ 

588 
_______ 

247 
______ 

588 
______ 

610 
(182) 
_______ 

616 
22 
_______ 

428 

638 

(181) 
______ 

(50) 
______ 

Total tax charge 

588 
______ 
The reasons for the difference between the actual tax charge for the year and the standard rate of corporation 
tax in the UK applied to profits for the year are as follows: 

247 
______ 

Profit before tax  

Expected tax charge based on the standard rate of corporation tax in the UK of 19% 
(2019: 19%) 
Effect of: 
Expenses not deductible for tax purposes 
Difference between depreciation for the year and capital allowances 
Tax relief on exercise of share options exercised 
Enhanced relief on research and development expenditure 
Overseas tax rate differences 
Deferred tax asset (recognised) 
Change in rate in respect of deferred tax recognition 
Adjustments in respect of prior years 
Foreign exchange 

Total tax charge 

2021 
£’000 
4,200 
_______ 

2020 
£’000 
4,002 
_______ 

798 

760 

20 
(3) 
(11) 
(366) 
3 
(10) 
- 
(182) 
(2) 
_______ 

24 
42 
4 
(338) 
10 
(5) 
69 
22 
- 
_______ 

247 
_______ 

588 
_______ 

The UK corporation tax rate is 19% (effective from 1 April 2017) and amendments were substantively enacted 
on 17 March 2020, the rate of corporation tax was set to remain at 19%. The deferred tax liabilities on 31 March 
2021 have been calculated based on this rate.  

92 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2021 

7. 

TAX EXPENSE (continued) 

As announced in the budget on the 03 March 2021, the UK corporation tax rate is expected to increase to 25% 
with effect from 1 April 2023. This change was not substantively enacted at the balance sheet date and has not 
been reflected in the tax calculations. 

R&D tax credits 

The Group recognised a credit of £10k (2020: £24k) within operating profit in relation to claims made under the 
Research  and  Development  expenditure  credit  scheme  (RDEC).  There  were  also  claims  made  under  the  SME 
scheme which are recognised within the tax expense. 

8. 

EARNINGS PER SHARE 

The earnings per share is based on the following: 

Adjusted continuing earnings post tax 
Reported continuing earnings post tax 

Weighted average number of shares 
Diluted number of shares 

Reported EPS 
Basic EPS from profit for the year 

Diluted EPS from profit for the year 

Adjusted EPS 
Adjusted Basic EPS from profit for the year 

Adjusted Diluted EPS from profit for the year 

2021 
£’000 
4,733 
3,953 

2020 
£’000 
4,002 
3,414 

8,524,883 
8,650,237 

8,510,074 
8,635,331 

46.4p 

45.7p 

55.5p 

54.7p 

40.1p 

39.5p 

47.0p 

46.3p 

Earnings per ordinary share has been calculated using the weighted average number of shares in issue during 
the year. The weighted average number of equity shares in issue was 8,524,883 (2020: 8,510,074) net of the 
treasury shares disclosed in note 27. 

The  diluted  earnings  per  share  is  based  on  8,650,237  (2020:  8,635,331)  ordinary  shares  which  allow  for  the 
exercise of all dilutive potential ordinary shares. 

The adjustments to profit made in calculating the adjusted earnings are set out in note 32. 

9. 

DIVIDENDS 

Prior year final dividend paid of 7.25p per share (2020: 8.3p) 
Current year interim dividend paid of 5.25p per share (2020: 5.25p) 
Cancelled dividends on shares held in treasury 

Final dividend proposed for the year 10.75p per share (2020: 7.25p) 

2021 
£’000 

620 
450 
(1) 
_______ 

1,069 
_______ 

919 
_______ 

2020 
£’000 

708 
448 
(3) 
_______ 

1,153 
_______ 

620 
_______ 

The proposed final dividend has not been accrued for as the dividend will be approved by the shareholders at 
the annual general meeting. 

93 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2021  

10. 

PROPERTY, PLANT AND EQUIPMENT 

Year ended 31 March 2021 

Cost 
1 April 2020 
Acquisitions (note 31) 
Additions 
Disposals 
Foreign Exchange 

31 March 2021 

Depreciation and impairment 
1 April 2020 
Charge for the year 
On disposals 
Foreign Exchange 

31 March 2021 

Net book value 
31 March 2021 

Year ended 31 March 2020 

Cost 
1 April 2019 
Additions 
Disposals 

31 March 2020 

Depreciation and impairment 
1 April 2019 
Charge for the year 
On disposal 

31 March 2020 

Net book value 
31 March 2020 

Land and 
Buildings 
£’000 

- 
446 
- 
- 
- 
_______ 
446 
_______ 

- 
- 
- 
- 
_______ 
- 
_______ 

446 
_______ 

Land and 
Buildings 
£’000 

- 
- 
- 
_______ 
- 
_______ 

- 
- 
- 
_______ 
- 
_______ 

- 

Short 
leasehold 
property 
improvements 
£’000 

1,518 
31 
402 
- 
- 
_______ 
1,951 
_______ 

727 
169 
- 
- 
_______ 
896 
_______ 

1,055 
_______ 

Short 
leasehold 
property 
improvements 
£’000 

1,453 
65 
- 
_______ 
1,518 
_______ 

494 
233 
- 
_______ 
727 
_______ 

791 
_______ 

94 

Fittings, 
equipment 
and 
computers 
£’000 

3,142 
126 
303 
- 
(1) 
_______ 
3,570 
_______ 

2,054 
345 
- 
(2) 
_______ 
2,397 
_______ 

1,173 
_______ 

Fittings, 
equipment 
and 
computers 
£’000 

2,743 
399 
- 
_______ 
3,142 
_______ 

1,783 
271 
- 
_______ 
2,054 
_______ 

1,088 
_______ 

Motor  
vehicles 
£’000 

847 
- 
51 
(220) 
- 
_______ 
678 
_______ 

440 
100 
(169) 
- 
_______ 
371 
_______ 

307 
_______ 

Motor  
vehicles 
£’000 

1,074 
115 
(342) 
_______ 
847 
_______ 

568 
142 
(270) 
_______ 
440 
_______ 

407 
_______ 

Total 
£’000 

5,507 
603 
756 
(220) 
(1) 
_______ 
6,645 
_______ 

3,221 
614 
(169) 
(2) 
_______ 
3,664 
_______ 

2,981 
_______ 

Total 
£’000 

5,270 
579 
(342) 
_______ 
5,507 
_______ 

2,845 
646 
(270) 
_______ 
3,221 
_______ 

2,286 
_______ 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2021 

11. 

RIGHT OF USE ASSETS 

Year ended 31 March 2021 

Cost 
1 April 2020 
Additions 
Acquisition additions (note 31) 
Disposals 

31 March 2021 

Depreciation 
1 April 2020 
Charge for the year 
Disposals 

31 March 2021 

Net book value 
31 March 2021 

Year ended 31 March 2020 

Cost 
1 April 2019 
Additions 

31 March 2020 

Depreciation 
1 April 2019 
Charge for the year 
Impairment 

31 March 2020 

Net book value 
31 March 2020 

Land and 
 buildings 
£’000 

1,894 
1,124 
726 
(140) 
_______ 
3,604 
_______ 

944 
459 
(140) 
_______ 
1,263 
_______ 

2,341 
_______ 

Land and 
 buildings 
£’000 

1,712 
182 
_______ 
1,894 
_______ 

407 
453 
84 
_______ 
944 
_______ 

950 
_______ 

Motor 
vehicles / 
other 
 £’000 

120 
72 
- 
(4) 
_______ 
188 
_______ 

15 
38 
- 
_______ 
53 
_______ 

135 
_______ 

Motor 
vehicles / 
other 
 £’000 

- 
120 
_______ 
120 
_______ 

- 
15 
- 
_______ 
15 
_______ 

105 
_______ 

Total 
£’000 

2,014 
1,196 
726 
(144) 
_______ 
3,792 
_______ 

959 
497 
(140) 
_______ 
1,316 
_______ 

2,476 
_______ 

Total 
£’000 

1,712 
302 
_______ 
2,014 
_______ 

407 
468 
84 
_______ 
959 
_______ 

1,055 
_______ 

The impairment of the right of use asset in 2020 related to space at the Group’s legacy Pangbourne site which 
has  been  exited  with  the  warehousing  consolidated  into  the  Group’s  Redditch  facility.  This  exit  has  been 
completed in the current financial year. 

The total depreciation expense of £497k (2020: £552k) has been charged to operating expenses. There are no 
material capital commitments at the balance sheet date. 

95 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2021 

12. 

INTANGIBLE ASSETS 

Year ended 31 March 2021 

Cost 
1 April 2020 
Additions 
Acquisitions (note 31) 

31 March 2021 

Amortisation 
1 April 2020 
Charge for the year 

31 March 2021 

Net book value 
31 March 2021 

Development 
Costs 
£’000 

Computer 
Software 
£’000 

Goodwill on 
Consolidation 
£’000 

Acquisition 
Intangible 
Assets 
£’000 

1,183 
250 
- 
_______ 
1,433 
_______ 

1,083 
250 
_______ 
1,333 
_______ 

100 
_______ 

402 
52 
19 
_______ 
473 
_______ 

302 
48 
_______ 
350 
_______ 

123 
_______ 

6,300 
- 
3,598 
_______ 
9,898 
_______ 

- 
- 
_______ 
- 
_______ 

9,898 
_______ 

3,378 
- 
5,403 
_______ 
8,781 
_______ 

1,665 
680 
_______ 
2,345 
_______ 

6,436 
_______ 

Total 
£’000 

11,263 
302 
9,020 
_______ 
20,585 
_______ 

3,050 
978 
_______ 
4,028 
_______ 

16,557 
_______ 

The cost of acquisition intangible assets comprises the estimated net present value of customer relationships 
identified on acquisitions.  The development costs relate to the cost of developing new products and technology 
to enable the company to extend its operations into new growth areas. Any assets developed that are no longer 
deemed to meet the recognition criteria of development costs have been written down. 

Year ended 31 March 2021 - Acquisition intangible assets 

Manufacturing division commercial relationships 
Value Added Supplies division commercial relationships 

Total 

Cost 
£’000 

2,075 
6,706 
_______ 

8,781 
_______ 

Net book 
value 
£’000 
1,426 
5,010 
_______ 

6,436 
_______ 

A decision was taken to accelerate the amortisation of intangible assets related to the 2013 acquisition of ‘2001’ 
commercial relationships within the VAS division from 10 years to 7 years based on a reassessment of the UEL of 
that asset . This is an additional charge of £264k to comprehensive income and takes the net book value to nil. 

96 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2021 

12. 

INTANGIBLE ASSETS (continued) 

Year ended 31 March 2020 

Development 
Costs 
£’000 

Computer 
Software 
£’000 

Goodwill on 
Consolidation 
£’000 

Acquisition 
Intangible 
Assets 
£’000 

Cost 
1 April 2019 
Additions 
Acquisitions 

31 March 2020 

Amortisation 
1 April 2019 
Charge for the year 

31 March 2020 

Net book value 
31 March 2020 

983 
200 
- 
_______ 
1,183 
_______ 

716 
367 
_______ 
1,083 
_______ 

100 
_______ 

321 
81 
- 
_______ 
402 
_______ 

214 
88 
_______ 
302 
_______ 

100 
_______ 

6,300 
- 
- 
_______ 
6,300 
_______ 

- 
- 
_______ 
- 
_______ 

6,300 
_______ 

3,378 
- 
- 
_______ 
3,378 
_______ 

1,160 
505 
_______ 
1,665 
_______ 

1,713 
_______ 

Total 
£’000 

10,982 
281 
- 
_______ 
11,263 
_______ 

2,090 
960 
_______ 
3,050 
_______ 

8,213 
_______ 

The cost of acquisition intangible assets comprises the estimated net present value of customer relationships 
identified on acquisitions. The development costs relate to the cost of developing new products and technology 
to enable the company to extend its operations into new growth areas. Any assets developed that are no longer 
deemed to meet the recognition criteria of development costs have been written down. 

Year ended 31 March 2020 - Acquisition intangible assets 

Manufacturing division commercial relationships 
Value Added Supplies division commercial relationships 

Total 

Cost 
£’000 

675 
2,703 
_______ 

3,378 
_______ 

Net book 
value 
£’000 
65 
1,648 
_______ 

1,713 
_______ 

97 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2021 

13.  GOODWILL AND IMPAIRMENT 

Details of the carrying amount of goodwill allocated to cash generating units (CGUs) are as follows: 

 Goodwill carrying amount 

Manufacturing division 
Value Added Supplies division 

Total 

2021 
£’000 

3,946 
5,952 
_______ 

9,898 
_______ 

2020 
£’000 

3,011 
3,289 
_______ 

6,300 
_______ 

The increase in Goodwill arises as a result of the acquisitions completed during the year see note 31. 

The  recoverable  amounts  of  all  the  above  CGUs  have  been  determined  from  a  review  of  the  current  and 
anticipated performance of these units. In preparing the projection, a pre tax discount rate of 10% (2020: 10%) 
has been used based on the Group’s estimated weighted average cost of capital.   

A future growth  and terminal growth rate of 2.5% (2020:  2.5%) has been assumed beyond the first year, for 
which the projection is based on the budget approved by the Board of Directors. It has been assumed investment 
in capital equipment will equate to depreciation over this period.  

The recoverable amount exceeds the carrying amount by £64,382k (2020: £40,492k).  

The headroom within the Manufacturing division is significant, the more sensitive CGU is the VAD division. If the 
following changes were made to the above key assumptions in respect of each division, the carrying amount 
would still exceed the recoverable amount for both divisions. 

Discount rate: Increase from 10% to 19% 
Growth rate: Reduction from 2.5% to nil% 

14. 

SUBSIDIARIES 

The subsidiaries of Solid State PLC, included in these consolidated financial statements are as follows: 

Subsidiary undertakings 

Nature of business 

Proportion of 
voting rights and 
Ordinary share 
capital held 

Solid State Supplies Limited 
Steatite Limited 

Pacer Technologies Limited 
Pacer Components Limited* 
Pacer LLC* 
Willow Technologies Limited^ 
American Electronic Components, Inc.*^ 
Active Silicon Limited^ 
Active Silicon, Inc.*^ 
Solid State Supplies Electronics Limited 
Creasefield Limited 
Q-Par Angus Limited 
Ginsbury Electronics Limited 
Wordsworth Technology Kent Limited 

Creasefield Crewkerne Limited 

*Indirect holdings. All other holdings are direct.  

UK 
UK 

UK 
UK 
USA 
UK 
USA 
UK 
USA 
Ireland 
UK 
UK 
UK 
UK 

UK 

100% 
100% 

100% 
100% 
100% 
100% 
100% 
100% 
100% 
100% 
100% 
100% 
100% 
100% 

100% 

Supply of electronic components. 
Supply of electronic components and 
manufacture of electronic equipment. 
Non trading entity 
Supply of opto-electronic components. 
Supply of opto-electronic components. 
Supply of opto-electronic components. 
Supply of opto-electronic components. 
Digital image design and manufacturing. 
Manufacturing sales facility 
Sales office 
Non trading entity 
Non trading entity 
Non trading entity 
Non trading entity 

Non trading entity 

The non-trading entities are exempt from filing audited accounts with the registrar under section 479a of the 
Companies Act 2006. 

98 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2021 

14. 

SUBSIDIARIES (continued) 

Aside from the operations in the USA and Ireland identified above, the country of operation and of incorporation 
is England and Wales, with the same registered office as Solid State PLC. The registered offices for operations in 
the US and Ireland are listed below. 

Subsidiary undertaking 

Registered Office 

Pacer USA LLC 
American Electronic Components, Inc. 
Active Silicon, Inc. 
Solid State Supplies Electronics Limited  3rd Floor Ulysses House, 23/24 Foley Street, Dublin 1, Dublin D01 W2T2, Ireland 

661 Maplewood Drive, Suite 10, Jupiter, FL 33458, USA 
1101 Lafayette Street, Elkhart, Indiana, 46516, USA 
479 Jumpers Hole Road, Suite 301, Severna Park, MD 21146, USA  

As set out in the audit committee report the UK trading subsidiaries (excepting Active Silicon Limited and Willow 
Technologies Limited, the new acquisitions marked with^) are exempt from the requirements to have an audit 
and  file  audited  financial  statements  by  virtue  of  section  479A  of  the  Companies  Act  2006.  In  adopting  the 
exemption Solid State PLC has provided a statutory guarantee to these subsidiaries in accordance with section 
479C of the Companies Act 2006. 

15. 

INVENTORIES 

Finished goods and goods for resale 
Work in progress 

Total inventories 

2021 
£’000 

9,056 
1,573 
_______ 

10,629 
_______ 

2020 
£’000 

8,583 
1,079 
_______ 

9,662 
_______ 

The  Directors  are  of  the  opinion  that  the  replacement  value  of  inventories  is  not  materially  different  to  the 
carrying value stated above. These carrying values are stated net of provisions of £3,271k (2020: £1,444k).  

An impairment loss of £418k (2020: £111k credit) was recognised in cost of sales during the year against inventory 
due to slow moving and obsolete items. 

Inventory recognised in cost of sales during the year as an expense was £43,061k (2020: £43,769k).    

16. 

TRADE AND OTHER RECEIVABLES 

Trade receivables 
Other receivables 
Prepayments 

2021 
£’000 

11,683 
157 
2,382 
_______ 

14,222 
_______ 

2020 
£’000 

11,111 
28 
2,720 
_______ 

13,859 
_______ 

Impairment losses against trade receivables of £608k were recognised within operating costs during the year 
(2020: £313k). 

99 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2021  

17. 

TRADE AND OTHER PAYABLES (CURRENT) 

Trade payables 
Other taxes and social security taxes 
Other payables 
Accruals 
Deferred consideration on acquisitions 

18. 

CONTRACT LIABILITIES  

Contract liabilities 

2021 
£’000 

4,192 
1,301 
88 
3,737 
2,572 
_______ 

11,890 
_______ 

2020 
£’000 

5,750 
1,320 
14 
3,513 
- 
_______ 

10,597 
_______ 

2021 
£’000 

2020 
£’000 

2,299 
_______ 

2,486 
_______ 

The contract liabilities identified above relate to unsatisfied performance obligations resulting from proforma 
and  advanced  customer  payments  where  we  have  not  recognised  the  revenue  and  provisions  for  product 
returned for rework. All these contract liabilities are expected to be recognised in the subsequent financial year. 

Revenue  recognised  within  the  year  includes  £2,161k  (2020:  £2,108k)  which  was  included  within  contract 
liabilities in the prior year. 

19. 

BANK BORROWINGS AND FACILITIES 

Current borrowings 
Bank borrowings 

Non current borrowings 
Bank borrowings 

Total borrowings 

Within one year 
Between one and two years 
Between two and five years 

Total borrowings 

100 

2021 
£’000 

2020 
£’000 

- 

333 

3,750 
_______ 

- 
_______ 

3,750 
_______ 

333 
_______ 

2021 
£’000 

2020 
£’000 

- 
3,750 
- 
_______ 

333 
- 
- 
_______ 

3,750 
_______ 

333 
_______ 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2021  

19. 

BANK BORROWINGS AND FACILITIES (continued) 

The bank facilities are secured by a fixed and floating charge over the assets of the Company and the Group. At 
the balance sheet date, the Group had the following facilities: 

•  Revolving credit facility of £7.5m (2020: £7.5m) of which £3.75m (2020: nil) was drawn at the balance 

• 

sheet date. This is a committed facility until Nov 2022 when it is due for renewal. 
In addition, the Group has a multi-currency overdraft facility of £1.0m (2020: £1.0m) which was undrawn 
at both year ends. Post year end this has been extended to £3.0m. 

At the 31 March 2020 £0.3m of the acquisition term loan remained drawn. This was repaid in full in May 2020. 

The  multi-currency  overdraft  facility  is  in  place  to  provide  flexibility  in  financing  short  term  multi-currency 
working capital requirements.  

The  Group’s  banking  facilities  are  subject  to  three  financial  covenants,  being:  leverage;  debt  service;  and  a 
tangible net worth covenant. These covenants were met at all measurement points throughout the period. 

20. 

RIGHT OF USE LEASE LIABILITIES  

Current right of use lease liabilities 
Non-current right of use lease liabilities 

Total right of use lease liabilities 

Within one year 
Between one and two year 
Between two and five years 

Total right of use lease liabilities 

2021 
£’000 

741 
1,802 
_______ 

2,543 
_______ 

2021 
£’000 

741 
654 
1,148 
_______ 

2,543 
_______ 

2020 
£’000 

471 
677 
_______ 

1,148 
_______ 

2020 
£’000 

471 
328 
349 
_______ 

1,148 
_______ 

101 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2021  

21. 

FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS  

The Group’s overall risk management programme seeks to minimise potential adverse effects on the Group’s 
financial performance. 

The Group’s financial instruments comprise cash and cash equivalents and various items such as trade payables 
and receivables that arise directly from its operations. The carrying value of all financial instruments equal their 
fair values. The Group is exposed through its operations to the following risks: 

• 
• 
• 
• 

Credit risk 
Foreign currency risk 
Liquidity risk 
Cash flow interest rate risk 

In common with all other businesses, the Group is exposed to risks that arise from its use of financial instruments.  
This note describes the Group’s objectives, policies and processes for managing those risks.  Further quantitative 
information in respect of these risks is presented throughout these financial statements. 

There have been no substantive changes in the Group’s exposure to financial instrument risks, also considering 
the acquisitions in the period, and consequently the objectives, policies and processes are unchanged from the 
previous period. 

The  Board  has  overall  responsibility  for  the  determination  of  the  Group’s  risk  management  policies.    The 
objective of the Board is to set policies that seek to reduce the risk as far as possible without unduly affecting 
the Group’s competitiveness and effectiveness.  Further details of these policies are set out below. 

Credit risk 
The Group is exposed to credit risk primarily on its trade receivables, which are spread over a range of customers 
and countries, a factor that helps to dilute the concentration of the risk. 

It  is  Group  policy,  implemented  locally,  to  assess  the  credit  risk  of  each  new  customer  before  entering  into 
binding contracts.  Each customer account is then reviewed on an ongoing basis (at least once a year) based on 
available information and payment history. 

The maximum exposure to credit risk is represented by the carrying value of receivable as shown in note 16 and 
in the statement of financial position.  The amount of the exposure shown in note 16 is stated net of provisions 
for doubtful debts. 

The  credit  risk  on  liquid  funds  is  low  as  the  funds  are  held  at  a  bank  with  a  high  credit  rating  assigned  by 
international credit rating agencies. 

Foreign currency risk 

Foreign exchange transaction risk arises when individual Group operations enter into transactions denominated 
in a currency other than their functional currency.  The general policy for the Group is to sell to customers in the 
same currency that goods are purchased in, reducing the transactional risk.  Where transactions are not matched, 
excess foreign currency amounts generated from trading are converted back to sterling and required foreign 
currency amounts are converted from sterling. Forward currency contracts are not used speculatively and are 
considered where the Group has a demand for foreign currency that it can reliably forecast. 

Liquidity risk 

The Group operates a Group overdraft facility common to all its trading companies. 

The Group has approximately a three month visibility in its trading and runs a rolling 3 month cash flow forecast.  
If any part of the Group identifies a shortfall in its future cash position the Group has sufficient facilities that it 
can direct funds to the location where they are required.  If this situation is forecast to continue into the future 
remedial action is taken. 

102 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2021  

21. 

FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS (continued) 

Cash flow interest rate risk 

External  Group  borrowings  are  approved  centrally.    The  Board  accepts  that  this  neither  protects  the  Group 
entirely from the risk of paying rates in excess of current market rates nor eliminates fully the cash flow risk 
associated with interest payments.  It considers, however, that by ensuring approval of borrowings is made by 
the Board the risk of borrowing at excessive interest rates is reduced.  The Board considers that the rates being 
paid are in line with the most competitive rates it is possible for the Group to achieve. 

Credit risk 

The carrying amount of financial assets represents the maximum credit exposure. The Group maintains its cash 
reserves at a reputable bank.  The maximum exposure to credit risk at the reporting date was: 

Loans and Receivables 

Current financial assets 
Trade and other receivables 
Cash and cash equivalents 

2021 
£’000 

2020 
£’000 

11,840 
6,914 
_______ 

18,754 
_______ 

11,139 
3,517 
_______ 

14,656 
_______ 

The maximum exposure to credit risk for trade receivables at the reporting date by geographic region was: 

Carrying value 

UK 
Non UK 

2021 
£’000 

7,700 
3,983 
_______ 
11,683 
_______ 

2020 
£’000 

8,235 
2,876 
_______ 
11,111 
_______ 

The  Group  policy  is  to  make  a  provision  against  those  debts  that  are  overdue,  unless  there  are  grounds  for 
believing that all or some of the debts will be collected.  During the year, the value of provisions made in respect 
of bad and doubtful debts was a charge of £618k (2020: £313k) which represented 1.0% (2020: 0.5%) of revenue. 
This provision is included within the sales, general and administration expenses in the Consolidated Statement 
of Comprehensive Income. 

103 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2021  

21. 

FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS (continued) 

Trade receivables ageing by geographical segment 

Geographical area 

Total 
£’000 

Current 
£’000 

2021 
UK 
Non UK 

Total 

UK 
Non UK 

Total provisions 

Total 

IFRS 9  
UK expected loss rate 
Non UK expected loss rate 

8,175 
4,168 
_______ 
12,343 

(496) 
(164) 
_______ 
(660) 
_______ 
11,683 
_______ 

6.1% 
3.9% 
_______ 

8,008 
3,907 
_______ 
11,915 

(401) 
(100) 
_______ 
(501) 
_______ 
11,414 
_______ 

5.0% 
2.6% 
_______ 

Geographical area 

Total 
£’000 

Current 
£’000 

2020 
UK 
Non UK 

Total 

UK 
Non UK 

Total provisions 

Total 

IFRS 9  
UK expected loss rate 
Non UK expected loss rate 

8,576 
3,031 
_______ 
11,607 

(341) 
(155) 
_______ 
(496) 
_______ 
11,111 
_______ 

4.0% 
5.1% 
_______ 

7,414 
2,265 
_______ 
9,679 

(54) 
(31) 
_______ 
(85) 
_______ 
9,594 
_______ 

0.7% 
1.3% 
_______ 

104 

30 days 
past due 
£’000 

112 
216 
_______ 
328 

(50) 
(22) 
_______ 
(72) 
_______ 
256 
_______ 

44.6% 
10.2% 
_______ 

30 days 
past due 
£’000 

878 
641 
_______ 
1,519 

(94) 
(25) 
_______ 
(119) 
_______ 
1,400 
_______ 

10.7% 
3.9% 
_______ 

60 days 
past due 
£’000 

15 
5 
_______ 
20 

(10) 
(2) 
_______ 
(12) 
_______ 
8 
_______ 

66.7% 
40.0% 
_______ 

60 days 
past due 
£’000 

124 
31 
_______ 
155 

(33) 
(9) 
_______ 
(42) 
_______ 
113 
_______ 

26.6% 
29.0% 
_______ 

90 days 
past due 
£’000 

40 
40 
_______ 
80 

(35) 
(40) 
_______ 
(75) 
_______ 
5 
_______ 

87.5% 
100.0% 
_______ 

90 days 
past due 
£’000 

160 
94 
_______ 
254 

(160) 
(90) 
_______ 
(250) 
_______ 
4 
_______ 

100.0% 
95.7% 
_______ 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2021 

21. 

FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS (continued) 

The Group records provision for impairment losses on its trade receivables separately from gross receivables. 
The movements on this allowance account during the year are summarised below: 

Opening balance 
Acquisition of subsidiaries 
Increase in provisions 
Written off against provisions 
Foreign exchange 

Closing balance 

2021 
£’000 

496 
19 
618 
(474) 
(1) 
_______ 

658 
_______ 

2020 
£’000 

191 
- 
313 
(8) 
- 
_______ 

496 
_______ 

The main factor used in assessing the expected impairment losses of trade receivables is the age of the balances 
and the circumstances of the individual customer. 

As shown in the earlier table, at 31 March 2021 trade receivables of £269k which were past their due date were 
not impaired (2020: £1,517k).  

Liquidity risk 

The following are maturities of financial liabilities, including estimated contracted interest payments. 

Carrying  
Amount 

Contractual 
cash flow 

12 months 
or less 

1 – 2 
Years 

2 – 5 
Years 

5+ 
Years 

2021 
Trade and other payables 
Borrowings 
Right of use lease liabilities 
Provisions 
Deferred consideration on 
acquisition 

2020 
Trade and other payables 
Borrowings 
Right of use lease liabilities 
Provisions 

9,318 
3,750 
2,543 
741 
7,522 

9,318 
3,750 
2,736 
741 
7,522 

9,318 
- 
763 
71 
2,572 

- 
3,750 
694 
20 
4,250 

- 
- 
1,279 
650 
700 

- 
- 
- 
- 
- 

_______ 

_______ 

_______ 

_______ 

_______ 

_______ 

23,874 
_______ 

24,067 
_______ 

12,724 
_______ 

8,714 
_______ 

2,629 
_______ 

- 
_______ 

10,597 
333 
1,148 
304 
_______ 

10,597 
333 
1,220 
304 
_______ 

10,597 
333 
492 
11 
_______ 

- 
- 
340 
11 
_______ 

- 
- 
388 
32 
_______ 

- 
- 
- 
250 
_______ 

12,382 
_______ 

12,454 
_______ 

11,433 
_______ 

351 
_______ 

420 
_______ 

250 
_______ 

105 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2021 

21. 

FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS (continued) 

Foreign currency risk 

The Group’s main foreign currency risk is the short-term risk associated with accounts receivable and payable 
denominated in currencies that are not the subsidiaries’ functional currency.  The risk arises on the difference in 
the exchange rate between the time invoices are raised/received and the time invoices are settled/paid.  For 
sales  denominated  in  foreign  currencies  the  Group  will  try,  as  far  as  practical,  to  ensure  that  the  purchases 
associated with the sale will be in the same currency.  

All monetary assets and liabilities of the Group were denominated in sterling with the exception of the following 
items which were denominated in US dollars, and which are included in the financial statements at the sterling 
value based on the exchange rate ruling at the statement of financial position date. 

The following tables show the net assets/(liabilities) exposed to US dollar and Euro exchange rate risk that the 
Group has at 31 March 2021: 

USD 

Trade receivables 
Cash and cash equivalents 
Trade payables  

EUR 

Trade receivables 
Cash and cash equivalents 
Trade payables  

2021 
£’000 

5,727 
3,121 
(930) 
_______ 

7,918 
_______ 

2021 
£’000 

337 
942 
(115) 
_______ 

1,164 
_______ 

2020 
£’000 

5,223 
1,342 
(1,439) 
_______ 

5,126 
_______ 

2020 
£’000 

130 
63 
(81) 
_______ 

112 
_______ 

The Group is exposed to currency risk because it undertakes trading transactions in US dollars and Euros.  The 
Directors do not generally consider it necessary to enter into derivative financial instruments to manage the 
exchange risk arising from its operations, but from time to time when the Directors consider foreign currencies 
are weak and it is known that there will be a requirement to purchase those currencies, forward arrangements 
are entered into.  There were no forward purchase agreements in place at 31 March 2021 (2020: £nil) with £nil 
net exposure (2020: £nil). 

The effect of a strengthening of 10% in the rate of exchange in the currencies against sterling at the statement 
of financial position date would have resulted in an estimated net increase in pre-tax profit for the year and an 
increase in net assets of approximately £1,009k (2020: £582k) and the effect of a weakening of 10% in the rate 
of exchange in the currencies against sterling at the statement of financial position date would have resulted in 
an estimated net decrease in pre-tax profit for the year and a decrease in net assets of approximately £826k 
(2020: £476k). 

106 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2021  

21. 

FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS (continued) 

Interest rate risk 

The Group finances its business through a Revolving credit facility and two term loans.  During the year the Group 
utilised this facility at a floating rate of interest.  

The Group’s banking facilities with Lloyds Bank plc incurs interest at the rate of between 2.0% and 2.55% over 
LIBOR.  The Group is affected by changes in the UK interest rate. As the loans are all based on variable interest 
rates the fair value of the Group’s borrowings is not materially different to the book value. 

In terms of sensitivity, if the ruling base rate had been 1% higher throughout the year the level of interest payable 
would have been £41k (2020: £67k) higher and if 1% lower throughout the year the level of interest payable 
would have been lower by the same amount. 

Capital risk management 

The Group defines total capital as equity in the consolidated statement of financial position plus net debt or less 
net funds plus deferred consideration. Total capital at 31 March 2021 was £29,860k (2020: £19,345k). 

The Group defines net (cash)/leverage as net (cash)/debt plus deferred consideration which totals £4,358k (2020: 
(£3,184k)). In calculating net (cash)/debt the Group has excluded the right of use lease liabilities of £2,543k (2020: 
£1,148k) from its definition and calculation. 

In managing its capital, the Group’s main objectives when managing capital are to safeguard the Group’s ability 
to continue as a going concern in order to provide returns for shareholders and benefits for other stakeholders 
and to maintain an optimal capital structure to reduce the cost of capital. 

Consistent  with  others  in  the  industry,  the  Group  monitors  capital  based  on  the  gearing  ratio.  This  ratio  is 
calculated as leverage divided by total capital. At 31 March 2021 the gearing ratio was 14.6% (2020: (16.5%)). 

The Group seeks to maintain a gearing ratio that balances risks and returns at an acceptable level and also to 
maintain sufficient funding to enable the Group to meet its working capital and strategic investment need in the 
light of changes in economic conditions and the characteristic of the underlying assets.  

In making decisions to adjust its capital structure to achieve these aims the Group considers not only its short-
term  position  but  also  its  long  term  operational  and  strategic  objectives  and  sets  the  amount  of  capital  in 
proportion to risk.  

The Group’s gearing ratio at 31 March 2021 is shown below: 

Cash and cash equivalents 
Borrowings / bank overdrafts 
Deferred Consideration 

Net (cash)/leverage 

Share capital 
Share premium account 
Retained earnings 
Capital redemption reserve 
Foreign exchange reserve 
Shares held in treasury 

Equity 

Gearing ratio (net leverage / (equity + net leverage)/cash)) 

107 

2021 
£’000 
(6,914) 
3,750 
7,522 
_______ 

4,358 
_______ 

428 
3,625 
21,508 
5 
6 
(70) 
_______ 

25,502 
_______ 

14.6% 
_______ 

2020 
£’000 
(3,517) 
333 
- 
_______ 

(3,184) 
_______ 

427 
3,626 
18,521 
5 
(7) 
(43) 
_______ 

22,529 
_______ 

(16.5%) 
_______ 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2021 

22. 

NET DEBT 

Year ended 31 March 2020 (£’000) 

Bank borrowing due within one year 
Bank borrowing due after one year 

Total borrowings 
Deferred consideration on acquisition 
of subsidiaries within one year 
Deferred consideration on acquisition 
of subsidiaries after one year 
Cash and cash equivalents  

(Net debt) / net cash 

Increase / (decrease) in cash in the year 
Increase in borrowings in the year 
Repayment of borrowings in the year 

Net movement resulting from cashflows 

At 1 April 
2020 

(333) 
- 
_______ 
(333) 
- 

Cash flow 

333 
(3,750) 
_______ 
(3,417) 
- 

Other non-
cash 
movement 

At 31 March 
2021 

- 
- 
_______ 
- 
(2,572) 

- 
(3,750) 
_______ 
(3,750) 
(2,572) 

- 

- 

(4,950) 

(4,950) 

3,517 
_______ 

3,184 
_______ 

3,439 
_______ 

22 
_______ 

(42) 
_______ 

(7,564) 
_______ 

2021 
£’000 
3,439 
(3,750) 
333 
_______ 

22 
_______ 

2021 
£’000 
3,184 

22 
(2,572) 
(4,950) 
(42) 
_______ 

(4,358) 
_______ 

6,914 
_______ 

(4,358) 
_______ 

2020 
£’000 
(180) 
- 
5,334 
_______ 

5,154 
_______ 

2020 
£’000 
(1,975) 

5,154 
- 
- 
5 
_______ 

3,184 
_______ 

Net cash at 1 April 

Net movement resulting from cashflows 
Contingent consideration recognised in year – short term (note 17) 
Contingent consideration recognised in year – long term  
Other non-cash movements 

(Net debt) / Net cash at 31 March 

108 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2021 

23. 

DEFERRED TAX 

The Group’s deferred tax positions arise primarily on share-based payments, accelerated capital allowances, 
capitalised development costs and intangible assets arising on acquisition of subsidiaries: 

At 1 April  
Deferred tax arising on acquisition of subsidiaries (note 31) 
Credit for the year 
Effect of changes to foreign exchange rates 
Deferred tax adjustment in respect of prior periods 
Effect of tax rate change 

Net deferred tax at 31 March 

Deferred tax (liabilities)/assets in relation to: 
Accelerated capital allowances on property plant and equipment 
Short term timing differences on intangible assets 
Share based payments 
Short term timing differences 
Losses carried forward 

Net deferred tax at 31 March 

Deferred tax assets 
Deferred tax liabilities 

Net deferred tax at 31 March 

The movements in respect of deferred tax in the year were as follows: 
Accelerated 
capital 
allowances 

Share 
based 
Payments 

Short term 
timing 
differences 
on 
intangible 
assets 

2021 
£’000 

(421) 
(1,061) 
181 
(2) 

- 
_______ 

(1,303) 
_______ 

(331) 
(1,266) 
96 
95 
103 
_______ 

(1,303) 
_______ 

188 
(1,491) 
_______ 
(1,303) 
_______ 

Short term 
timing 
differences 

Losses 
carried 
forward 

2020 
£’000 

(471) 
- 
119 
- 

(69) 
_______ 

(421) 
_______ 

(193) 
(369) 
81 
60 
- 
_______ 

(421) 
_______ 

86 
(507) 
_______ 
(421) 
_______ 

Total 

At 1 April  
Additions 
Recognised in 
statement of 
comprehensive income 

At 31 March 

(193) 
(142) 
4 

(369) 
(897) 
- 

81 
- 
14 

60 
- 
36 

- 
103 
- 

(421) 
(936) 
54 

_______ 
(331) 
_______ 

_______ 
(1,266) 
_______ 

_______ 
95 
_______ 

_______ 
96 
_______ 

_______ 
103 
_______ 

_______ 
(1,303) 
_______ 

109 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2021 

23. 

DEFERRED TAX (continued)  

The UK corporation tax rate is 19% (effective  from  1 April 2017)  which  was last substantively  enacted on 17 
March 2020. The deferred tax liabilities at 31 March 2021 have been calculated based on this rate. As announced 
at the budget on 3 March 2021, the UK corporation tax rate is expected to increase to 25% with effect from 1 
April 2023. This change was not substantively enacted at the balance sheet date. The impact of re-calculating the 
deferred tax at the 25% rate would increase the net deferred tax liability by approximately £370k. 

The amount of the net reversal of deferred tax expected to occur next year is approximately £191k (2020: £141k) 
relating to the timing differences identified above. 

There is an unrecognised deferred tax asset of £84k (2020: £17k) in respect of the future tax deduction that 
would be available based on the share price at the balance sheet date compared to the share price at the date 
of  grant  of  the  options  and  share  bonus  which  is  used  to calculate  the  share  based  payments  charge.  If  this 
deferred tax asset had been recognised it would have been credited to other comprehensive income. This was 
not  recognised  given  it  is  immaterial  and  the  exercise  of  the  share  price  post  year  end  when  the  shares  are 
exercised may be lower than at the balance sheet date therefore this deferred tax asset may not be recoverable.  

In addition, there is an unrecognised deferred tax asset in relation to capital losses carried forward. The capital 
losses carried forward are approximately £275k. The associated deferred tax asset of approximately £52k has 
not been recognised due to the uncertainty over the recoverability combined with the fact it is immaterial. 

24. 

PROVISIONS 

At 1 April  
Dilapidations acquired on acquisitions at FV (note 31) 
Provisions utilised during the year 
Recognition of dilapidation asset 
Charged to statement of comprehensive income 

Provisions at 31 March 

2021 
£’000 

304 
43 
7 
400 
- 
_______ 
741 
_______ 

2020 
£’000 

250 
- 
- 
- 
54 
_______ 
304 
_______ 

The  Group  has  provided  for property  related  provisions which  include  obligations  in  respect  of  exited  legacy 
premises and dilapidations provisions it expects to exit within the next 5 years. Based on using a risk-free discount 
rate of 2.5% the Group has assessed the impact of discounting to be immaterial and has not therefore discounted 
the provisions. 

25. 

SHARE CAPITAL 

Allotted issued and fully paid 
8,564,878 (2020: 8,548,878) ordinary shares of 5p 

2021 
£’000 

2020 
£’000 

428 
_______ 

427 
_______ 

The ordinary shares carry no right to fixed income, the holders are entitled to receive dividends as declared and 
are entitled to one vote per share at shareholder meetings. 

Details of options granted are set out in the Remuneration Committee Report on pages 44 to 57.  At 31 March 
2021 the number of shares covered by option agreements amounted to 79,550 (2020: Nil). At the balance sheet 
date there were 96,000 (2020: 112,000) share options which had vested and remained unexercised. 

Share options exercised in the prior year by the Directors are disclosed in the Remuneration Committee Report 
on pages 54 to 57. 

110 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2021 

26. 

RESERVES 
Full details of movements in reserves are set out in the consolidated statement of changes in equity on page 70. 

The following describes the nature and purpose of each reserve within owners’ equity. 

Reserve 
Share premium 

Capital redemption 

Retained earnings 

Shares held in treasury 

Foreign exchange  

Description and Purpose 
Amount subscribed for share capital in excess of 
nominal value. 
Amounts transferred from share capital on redemption 
of issued shares. 
Cumulative net gains and losses recognised in the 
consolidated statement of comprehensive income. 
Shares held by the Group for future staff share plan 
awards 
Foreign exchange translation differences arising from 
the translation of the financial statements of foreign 
operations  

27. 

TREASURY SHARES 
At 31 March 2021 the Group held 11,374 (2020: 7,374) shares in treasury with a cost of £70k (2020: £43k). No 
shares have been cancelled. 

At 1 April  
Purchase of shares into treasury  
Transfer of shares to the All 
Employee Share Plan (AESP) 

At 31 March 

28. 

SHARE BASED PAYMENT 

2021 
shares 

7,374 
15,000 
(11,000) 

_______ 
11,374 
_______ 

2020 
Shares 

29,374 
- 
(22,000) 

_______ 
7,374 
_______ 

The total amount charged to the income statement in 2021 in respect of share-based payments was £171,000 
(2020: £381,000) 

The company operates two long term share incentive schemes set out below: 

Long term incentive plan (LTIP): 

For  2021,  normal  LTIP  awards  of  up  to  125%  of  salary  may  be  made  to  Executive  Directors  and  Senior 
management, as outlined in the Policy Table of the remuneration report on page 52.   

For all participants, awards will vest after three years in accordance with the performance conditions applicable 
to each grant. Options are granted with a contractual life of ten years and with a fixed exercise price of 5p equal 
to the par value of the shares or as otherwise disclosed in the remuneration report. 

The performance conditions will be determined and set by the Remuneration Committee in accordance with the 
remuneration policy. No award will vest below Threshold performance, and vesting will increase on a straight-
line basis between threshold, target and stretch.  

111 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2021 

28. 

SHARE BASED PAYMENT (continued) 

On the 28 October 2020 42,800 (2020: nil) share options were granted to the Executive Directors under the LTIP. 

Principal assumptions 

Weighted average share price at grant date in pence 
Weighted average exercise price in pence 
Weighted average vesting period (years) 
Option life (years) 
Weighted average expected life (years) 
Weighted average expected volatility factor 
Weighted average risk free rate 
Dividend yield 

2021 

580 
5 
3 
10 
3 
50% 
0.75% 
2.5% 

2020 

- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 

The  expected  volatility  factor  is  based  on  historical  share  price  volatility  over  the  three  years  immediately 
preceding the grant of the option. The expected life is the average expected period to exercise. The risk-free rate 
of return is the yield of zero-coupon UK government bonds of a term consistent with the assumed option life.  

Non-market  performance  conditions  are  incorporated  into  the  calculation  of  fair  value  by  estimating  the 
proportion of share options that will vest and be exercised based on a combination of historical trends and future 
expected trading performance. These are reassessed at the end of each period for each tranche of unvested 
options. 

Company Share Option Plan (CSOP): 

CSOP  awards  of  up  to  the  HMRC  tax  approved  levels  of  £30,000  may  be  made  to  senior  staff  and  Executive 
Directors, as outlined in the Policy Table of the remuneration report on page 52. For all participants, awards will 
vest after three years in accordance with the performance conditions applicable to each grant.  

Options are granted with a contractual life of ten years and with a fixed exercise price equal to the market value 
of the shares under option at the date of grant or as otherwise disclosed in the remuneration report 

The performance conditions will be determined and set by the Remuneration Committee in accordance with the 
remuneration policy. No award will vest below Threshold performance, and vesting will increase on a straight-
line basis between threshold, target and stretch.  

On the 30 September 2020 36,750 (2020: nil) share options were granted to the senior management under CSOP.  

Principal assumptions 

Weighted average share price at grant date in pence 
Weighted average exercise price in pence 
Weighted average vesting period (years) 
Option life (years) 
Weighted average expected life (years) 
Weighted average expected volatility factor 
Weighted average risk free rate 
Dividend yield 

2021 

587 
592 
3 
10 
3 
50% 
0.75% 
2.5% 

2020 

- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 

112 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2021 

28. 

SHARE BASED PAYMENT (continued) 

Movement in share options during the year 

In addition to the current CSOP and LTIP there are bought forward executive EMI options which have vested 
which remain unexercised at the balance sheet date. 

At 1 April  
Granted  
Exercised 
Cancelled / lapsed 

At 31 March 

2021 
Number of 
options 
112,000 
79,550 
16,000 
- 
_______ 
175,550 
_______ 

2021 
average 
exercise 
0.1 
276 
0.1 
- 
_______ 
125 
_______ 

2021 
Number of 
options 
128,000 
- 
16,000 
- 
_______ 
112,000 
_______ 

2021 
average 
exercise 
0.1 
- 
0.1 
- 
_______ 
0.1 
_______ 

The weighted average share price at the date share options were exercised was 544p (2020: 637p). 

As at 31 March 2021, the total number of long-term incentive awards and share options held by employees was 
175,550 (2020: 112,000) as follows: 

Option price pence/share 

0.1p 
5p – 592p 

At 31 March 

Option period 
ending 

31 March 2027 
31 March 2030 

2021 
Number of 
options 
96,000 
79,550 
_______ 
175,550 
_______ 

2020 
Number 
of 
112,000 
- 
_______ 
112,000 
_______ 

No share options have vested in the period. (In the year ended 31 March 2020 64,000 options vested as the 
performance criteria were achieved). 

All Employee Share plan (AESP) 

AESP awards of up to the HMRC tax approved levels to all employees. These awards vest tax free from the AESP 
after at least three years but not more than five years from the date of grant subject to continued employment. 

On the 21 January 2021 10,900 (2020: 21,400) share options were awarded to the employees under the AESP.  

The share price at the date of award was 680p (2020: 643p) as the awards are effectively £nil cost awards the 
fair value is determined to equal to the share price at the date of grant under the Black Scholes model. This 
resulted in a share based payments charge of  £74k (2020: £137k) as part of the total  share based payments 
charge. 

29. 

CAPITAL COMMITMENTS 

At 31 March 2021 there were capital commitments of £371k (2020: £Nil). 

113 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2021  

30. 

SEGMENT INFORMATION 

The  Group’s  primary  reporting  format  for  segment  information  is  business  segments  which  reflect  the 
management reporting structure in the Group.  The Value Added Supplies division comprises Solid State Supplies 
Ltd, Pacer LLC, Pacer Components Ltd, Willow Technologies Limited and American Electronic Components, Inc. 
companies. The Manufacturing division includes Steatite Ltd, Active Silicon Limited and Active Silicon Inc.. 

Year ended 31 March 2021 

External revenue 

Profit before tax 
Taxation 

Profit after taxation 

Consolidated statement of financial position 
Assets 
Liabilities 

Net assets 

Other  
Capital expenditure: 
  Tangible fixed assets  
  Tangible fixed assets - acquisitions  

Intangible assets 
Intangible assets – acquisitions  

  Right of use assets 
  Right of use assets – acquisitions 
Depreciation - PPE 
Depreciation – right of use assets 
Amortisation 
Share based payments 
Interest 

Value Added 
Supplies 
division 
£’000 
38,982 
______ 
2,011 
(337) 
______ 
1,674 

Manufacturing 
division 
£’000 
27,299 
______ 
4,353 
(310) 
______ 
4,043 

Head  
office 
£’000 
- 
______ 
(2,164) 
400 
______ 
(1,764) 

Continuing 
operations 
£’000 
66,281 
______ 
4,200 
(247) 
______ 
3,953 

22,631 
(8,804) 
______ 
13,827 

413 
504 
45 
3 
315 
27 
379 
207 
19 
- 
35 
______ 

14,852 
(7,680) 
______ 
7,172 

16,484 
(11,981) 
______ 
4,503 

53,967 
(28,465) 
______ 
25,502 

343 
99 
257 
19 
881 
699 
235 
290 
279 
- 
14 
_____ 

- 
- 
- 
8,998 
- 
- 
- 
- 
680 
171 
36 
______ 

756 
603 
302 
9,020 
1,196 
726 
614 
497 
978 
171 
85 
______ 

No individual customer contributed more than 10% of the Group’s revenue in the financial year ended 31 March 
2021 or the prior year.   

114 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2021 

30. 

SEGMENT INFORMATION (continued) 

Year ended 31 March 2020 

External revenue 

Profit before tax 
Taxation 

Profit after taxation 

Consolidated statement of financial position 
Assets 
Liabilities 

Net assets 

Other 

Capital expenditure: 
  Tangible fixed assets  
  Intangible assets 
  Right of use Assets 
Depreciation - PPE 
Depreciation – right of use assets 
Impairment 
Amortisation 
Share based payments 
Interest 

Value Added 
Supplies 
division 
£’000 
39,247 
______ 
2,252 
(510) 
______ 
1,742 

Manufacturing 
division 
£’000 
28,170 
______ 
4,439 
(538) 
______ 
3,901 

18,649 
(6,521) 
______ 
12,128 

384 
2 
181 
323 
222 
84 
51 
- 
21 
______ 

11,890 
(7,845) 
______ 
4,045 

196 
279 
120 
323 
246 
- 
404 
- 
19 
_____ 

Head  
office 
£’000 
- 
______ 
(2,689) 
460 
______ 
(2,229) 

8,139 
(1,783) 
______ 
6,356 

- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
505 
381 
80 
______ 

Continuing 
operations 
£’000 
67,417 
______ 
4,002 
(588) 
______ 
3,414 

38,678 
(16,149) 
______ 
22,529 

580 
281 
301 
646 
468 
84 
960 
381 
120 
______ 

External revenue by 
location of customer 

Total assets by 
location of assets 

Net tangible capital 
expenditure by location 
of assets 

2021 
£’000 

2020 
£’000 

2021 
£’000 

2020 
£’000 

2021 
£’000 

United Kingdom 
Rest of Europe 
Asia 
North America 
Other 

46,301 
7,349 
3,342 
9,148 
141 
_______ 

48,596 
6,885 
4,416 
7,235 
285 
_______ 

49,616 
1 
- 
4,151 
- 
_______ 

36,919 
1 
- 
1,758 
- 
_______ 

1,058 
- 
- 
- 
- 
_______ 

2020 
£’000 

881 
- 
- 

- 
_______ 

66,281 
_______ 

67,417 
_______ 

53,768 
_______ 

38,678 
_______ 

1,058 
_______ 

881 
_______ 

All the above relate to continuing operations.  
Capital expenditure excludes acquisitions of assets as per note 31. 

115 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2021 

31.   ACQUISITIONS DURING THE YEAR 

Active Silicon Group  

On the 26 February 2021, the Group acquired 100% of the share capital of Active Silicon Limited and its 100% 
subsidiary for an initial consideration of £6.15m which, when adjusted for the cash on the balance sheet, results 
in an effective net initial consideration of £2.15m. 

In addition to the initial consideration there is a 25 month earn out period. The earn out consideration will be 
paid in two tranches based on the level of profit after tax generated in the periods ending 31 March 2022 and 31 
March 2023 respectively. In aggregate, the fair value of the earn out consideration is estimated to be £1.45m 
under IFRS 3.  

Active Silicon Limited is the UK trading entity and holds Active Silicon Inc., the US sales entity. Established in 1988, 
Active Silicon designs and manufactures imaging and embedded vision systems allowing the capture, processing, 
and  transmission  of  image  data  in  high  performance  and  critical  environments.  World-class  products  include 
innovative  embedded  systems  for  IoT  applications,  pioneering  autofocus-zoom  cameras  and  high-speed 
acquisition cards allowing real-time, high-resolution image capture over long cable lengths. With a longstanding, 
global  customer  base,  Active  Silicon’s  products  have  applications  in  multiple  areas  of  industry,  science,  and 
technology - including advanced manufacturing, life sciences, robotics, medical imaging, security and defence. 
Active Silicon is ISO9001: 2015 registered. 

Active Silicon’s headquarters and research & development centre are in Iver (west of London) with its production 
facility nearby in Langley. In addition, it has a US subsidiary, Active Silicon Inc., which operates from Severna Park, 
Maryland. This office provides sales, support, and operations for the North American market.  

All hardware is designed in-house with some subcontract manufacturing taking place in Europe. Final assembly, 
inspection and testing is undertaken at the UK production facility. 

Benefits of the Acquisition: 

Solid State will combine Active Silicon’s expertise and technology with the industrial computer product portfolio 
from its Steatite manufacturing division. This enables the enlarged Group to address the growing demand for 3D 
vision and robotic applications, as well as the increased requirements for embedded machine vision and edge AI 
computing products. 

The enhanced in-house capability resulting from the addition of Active Silicon to the Group extends the scope for 
the design and manufacture of own brand products, with the resulting margin and customer retention benefits. 

116 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2021 

31.   ACQUISITIONS DURING THE YEAR (continued) 

Active Silicon Group  

Intangible assets 
Property plant and equipment 
Right of use assets 
Inventory 
Trade and other receivables 
Trade and other payables 
Right of use lease liabilities 
Provision for dilapidations 
Cash and cash equivalents 
Deferred tax asset / (liability) 

Net assets on acquisition 
Goodwill on acquisition 

Consideration 

Discharged by: 
Cash paid on acquisition 
S-T Deferred contingent consideration – Completion Accounts 
L-T Deferred contingent consideration – Earn Out 

Book 
value 
£’000 

Fair value 
Adjustment 
£’000 

Fair value 
to Group 
£’000 

19 
106 
- 
1,243 
821 
(640) 
- 
(18) 
4,008 
84 
_______ 

5,623 
- 
_______ 

1,400 
(7) 
699 
(17) 
(8) 
(46) 
(699) 
(15) 
- 
(261) 
_______ 

1,046 
- 
_______ 

1,419 
99 
699 
1,226 
813 
(686) 
(699) 
(33) 
4,008 
(177) 
_______ 

6,669 
935 
_______ 

7,604 
_______ 

5,171 
983 
1,450 
_______ 
7,604 

The intangible assets are in relation to customer contacts and relationships. The goodwill recognised represents 
expected synergies from combining the operations of  Active Silicon with those of the existing  Computing BU 
within the manufacturing division, expected value from incremental sales arising across the combined operation 
that is not separately recognisable at the date of acquisition and the value of the work force not recognised as 
an intangible asset under IFRS 3 revised. 

The  revenue  and  profit  after  tax  for  the  one  month  period  post  acquisition  included  in  the  Statement  of 
Comprehensive Income arising from Active’s operations were £415k and £39k respectively. The Group incurred 
acquisition  related  costs  of  £76k  on  legal  fees  and  due  diligence  costs,  included  in  sales,  general  and 
administration expenses. 

As payment is due in under 2 years and the amount is an estimation, using a risk-free discount rate of 2.5% the 
Group has assessed the impact of discounting to be immaterial and has not therefore discounted the contingent 
consideration.  

Had the acquisition been completed on the 1 April 2020, Management estimate that that the revenue would 
have been circa £4.4m and pre-tax profit would be circa £0.2m.  

117 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2021 

31.   ACQUISITIONS DURING THE YEAR (continued) 

Willow Technology Group  

On the 02 March 2021, the Group acquired 100% of the share capital of Willow Technology Limited and its 100% 
subsidiary for an initial consideration of £9.6m which, when adjusted for the cash on the balance sheet, results 
in an effective net initial consideration of £4.5m.  

In addition to the initial consideration there is a 12 month earn out period. The earn out consideration will be 
calculated as a function of the post-tax profit of Willow Technologies for the period ended 31 March 2022, subject 
to a minimum profit threshold of £700,000. The maximum earn out consideration payable is £3.5m. Under IFRS 
3 the Board has concluded that the fair value of the deferred contingent consideration is £3.5m. 

Willow  Technologies,  founded  in  1989,  is  a  highly  respected  value  added  distributor  of  electro-mechanical 
components  operating  within  the  UK,  Germany,  Spain  and  the  USA.  Willow  Technologies’  specialisms  are  in 
switching,  sensing,  resistive  devices  and  hermetic  seal  solutions,  the  company  sells  a  wide  portfolio  of 
electromechanical technologies. Willow is ISO9001: 2015 registered. 

American Electronic Components Inc. (“AEC”), founded as Durakool in 1935 and acquired by Willow Technologies 
in  2006,  is  based  in  Indiana  USA.  AEC  specialises  in  the  design,  manufacture  and  supply  of  component  level, 
electromechanical  switching,  sensing  and  glass  to  metal  seal  solutions.  The  company  has  over  85  years  of 
applications  experience  with  a  well-established  and  loyal  customer  base.  AEC  is  ISO9001:  2008  and 
ISO14001:2004 Registered. 

Benefits of the Acquisition: 

The acquisition of Willow and AEC into the Value Added Supplies division of Solid State meets a significant number 
of strategic priorities and offers the opportunity for future growth in multiple structural markets and geographic 
territories. 

Furthermore,  the  Acquisition  meets  the  objective  of  increasing  the  division’s  penetration  of  the  strategically 
important, EV, EV charging, green tech and medical markets. The consequent acquisition of the Durakool® and 
Hermaseal®  established  brand  names  and  associated  patents  brings  further  opportunity  for  growth  through 
product development and the extension of the brand to potentially cover other products within the Group. The 
widening of the product offering within the  Value  Added  Supplies division will bring greater resilience to the 
business, access to a wider customer base and increase the importance of the division to its existing customer 
base. 

Whilst the Acquisition falls under the Value Added Supplies division it is expected that both Willow and AEC will 
operate as stand-alone companies throughout the earn out period. Both companies are however expected to 
benefit from access to the wider resources available in the Value Added Supplies business and in particular from 
access  to  the  wider  customer  base.  Post-acquisition  a  detailed  strategic  appraisal  of  non-core  manufactured 
components will be undertaken to evaluate whether or not they should be discontinued with an appropriate last 
time buy process implemented in order to improve strategic focus and production efficiencies. 

118 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2021 

31.   ACQUISITIONS DURING THE YEAR (continued) 

Willow Technology Group 

Intangible assets 
Property plant and equipment 
Right of use assets 
Inventory 
Trade and other receivables 
Trade and other payables 
Right of use lease liabilities 
Provision for dilapidations 
Cash and cash equivalents 
Deferred tax 

Net assets on acquisition 
Goodwill on acquisition 

Consideration 

Discharged by: 
Cash paid on acquisition 
S-T Deferred contingent consideration – Completion Accounts 
L-T Deferred contingent consideration – Earn Out 

Book 
value 
£’000 

Fair value 
Adjustment 
£’000 

Fair value 
to Group 
£’000 

3 
504 
- 
1,479 
1,559 
(1,230) 
- 
- 
5,099 
(123) 
_______ 

7,291 
- 
_______ 

4,000 
- 
27 
142 
(5) 
(175) 
(28) 
(10) 
- 
(761) 
_______ 

3,190 
- 
_______ 

4,003 
504 
27 
1,621 
1,554 
(1,405) 
(28) 
(10) 
5,099 
(884) 
_______ 

10,481 
2,663 
_______ 

13,144 
_______ 

8,055 
1,589 
3,500 
_______ 
13,144 

The intangible assets are in relation to customer contacts and relationships. The goodwill recognised represents 
expected  synergies  from  combining  the  operations  of  Willow  Technologies  with  those  of  the  existing  VAS 
division,  expected  value  from  incremental  sales  arising  across  the  combined  operation that  is  not  separately 
recognisable at the date of acquisition and the value of the work force not recognised as an intangible asset 
under IFRS 3 revised. 

The  revenue  and  profit  after  tax  for  the  one  month  period  post  acquisition  included  in  the  Statement  of 
Comprehensive Income arising from Willow’s operations were £906k and £152k respectively. The Group incurred 
acquisition  related  costs  of  £130k  on  legal  fees  and  due  diligence  costs,  included  in  sales,  general  and 
administration expenses. 

As payment is due in just over 1 year and the amount is an estimation, using a risk-free discount rate of 2.5% the 
Group has assessed the impact of discounting to be immaterial and has not therefore discounted the contingent 
consideration.  

Had the acquisition been completed on the 1 April 2020 management estimate that that the revenue would have 
been circa £9.1m and pre-tax profit would be circa £0.8m. 

119 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2021 

32.   ADJUSTMENTS TO PROFIT 

The Group’s results are reported after a number of imputed non-cash charges and non-recurring items. We have 
provided  additional  adjusted performance  metrics  to  aid  understanding  and  provide  clarity  over  the  Group’s 
performance on an on-going cash basis before imputed non-cash accounting charges. This is consistent with how 
analysts  and  investors  tell  us  they  review  our  business  performance  in  presenting  an  adjusted  profit  metric 
adjusting for the following items: 

•  Non-cash charges arising from share-based payments and the amortisation of acquisition intangibles. 
•  Non-recurring cash costs relating to the re-organisation of the Manufacturing division and acquisition costs. 
•  Non-recurring profit from the sale of fully written down stock. 
•  Non-recurring tax credits arising primarily from prior year R&D claims and tax deductions on share options. 

Acquisition and re-organisation costs 
Non recurring profit from sale of full written down stock 
Amortisation of acquisition intangibles 
Share based payments 

Adjustment to profit before tax 
Current and deferred taxation effect 
Non recurring tax credits 

Adjustments to profit after tax 

Reported gross profit 
Adjustments to gross profit 

Adjusted gross profit 

Reported operated profit 
Adjustments to operating profit 

Adjusted operating profit 

Reported operating margin percentage 
Operating margin percentage impact of adjustments 

Adjusted operating margin percentage 

Reported profit before tax 
Adjustments to profit before tax 

Adjusted profit before tax 

Reported profit after tax 
Adjustments to profit after tax 

Adjusted profit after tax 

120 

2021 
£’000 
336 
- 
680 
171 
_______ 
1,187 
(226) 
(181) 
_______ 
780 

2021 
£’000 
19,919 
73 
_______ 
19,992 
_______ 
4,285 
1,187 
_______ 
5,472 
_______ 
6.5% 
1.8% 
_______ 
8.3% 
_______ 
4,200 
1,187 
_______ 
5,387 
_______ 
3,953 
780 
_______ 
4,733 
_______ 

2020 
£’000 
- 
(160) 
505 
381 
_______ 
726 
(138) 
- 
_______ 
588 

2020 
£’000 
20,803 
(160) 
_______ 
20,643 
_______ 
4,122 
726 
_______ 
4,848 
_______ 
6.1% 
1.1% 
_______ 
7.2% 
_______ 
4,002 
726 
_______ 
4,728 
_______ 
3,414 
588 
_______ 
4,002 
_______ 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
COMPANY STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION 
at 31 March 2021 

Company Number: 00771335 

2021 

2020 

Notes 

£’000 

£’000 

£’000 

£’000 

FIXED ASSETS 
Investments 

CURRENT ASSETS 
Trade and other receivables 
Deferred tax asset 
Cash and cash equivalents 

CREDITORS:  Amounts falling due within one year 

NET CURRENT LIABILITIES 

NON CURRENT LIABILITIES 
Non current borrowings 
Deferred consideration on acquisitions 

NET ASSETS 

CAPITAL AND RESERVES 
Called up share capital 
Share premium account 
Capital redemption reserve 
Retained earnings  
Shares held in treasury 

SHAREHOLDERS’ FUNDS 

4 

5 

6 

7 
7 

8 
9 
9 
9 
10 

34,003 

13,255 

3,223 
96 
16 
_______ 
3,335 

(22,511) 
_______ 

4,370 
86 
28 
_______ 
4,484 

(10,903) 
  _______ 

(19,176) 
  _______ 

(6,419) 
  _______ 

(3,750) 
(4,950) 
_______ 

- 
- 
  _______ 

(8,700) 

- 

6,127 
  _______ 

428 
3,625 
5 
2,139 
(70) 
  _______ 

6,127 
  _______ 

6,836 
  _______ 

427 
3,626 
5 
2,821 
(43) 
  _______ 

6,836 
  _______ 

The company made a total comprehensive income in the year of £284k (2020: £716k). 

The financial statements were approved by the Board of Directors and authorised for issue on 13 July 2021. 

G S Marsh, Director   

P O James, Director   

The notes on pages 123 to 126 form part of these financial statements. 

121 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                                           
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
COMPANY STATEMENT OF CHANGES IN EQUITY 
For the year ended 31 March 2021 

Share 
Capital 
£’000 

Share  
Premium 
reserve 
£’000 

Capital 
Redemption 
Reserve 
£’000 

Retained 
earnings 
£’000 

Shares 
Held in 
Treasury 
£’000 

Share-
holders 
Funds 
£’000 

Balance at 31 March 2020 

427 

3,626 

5 

2,821 

(43) 

6,836 

Total comprehensive 
income for the year ended 
31 March 2021 

Shares issued 

Purchase of treasury 
shares 

Transfer of treasury shares 
to AESP 

Dividends 

Share based payment 
credit 

- 

1 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

(1) 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

284 

- 

- 

- 

- 

284 

- 

(95) 

(95) 

(68) 

68 

- 

(1,069) 

171 

- 

- 

(1,069) 

171 

_______ 

_______ 

_______ 

_______ 

_______ 

_______ 

Balance at 31 March 2021 

428 
_______ 

3,625 
_______ 

5 
_______ 

2,139 
_______ 

(70) 
_______ 

6,127 
_______ 

Share 
Capital 
£’000 

Share  
Premium 
reserve 
£’000 

Capital 
Redemption 
Reserve 
£’000 

Retained 
earnings 
£’000 

Shares 
Held in 
Treasury 
£’000 

Share-
holders 
Funds 
£’000 

Balance at 1 April 2019 

427 

3,627 

5 

3,005 

(172) 

6,892 

Issue of new shares 

Rounding 

Total comprehensive 
income for the year ended 
31 March 2020 

Share based payment credit 

Shares transfer to the AESP 

Dividends 

1 

(1) 

- 

- 

- 

(1) 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

1 

716 

381 

- 

- 

- 

- 

(129) 

129 

- 

- 

716 

381 

- 

- 
_______ 

- 
_______ 

- 
_______ 

(1,153) 
_______ 

- 
_______ 

(1,153) 
_______ 

Balance at 31 March 2020 

427 
_______ 

3,626 
_______ 

5 
_______ 

2,821 
_______ 

(43) 
_______ 

6,836 
_______ 

The notes on pages 123 to 126 form part of these financial statements. 
122 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE COMPANY FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2021  

1. 

ACCOUNTING POLICIES 

The  following  accounting  policies  have  been  applied  consistently  in  dealing  with  items  which  are  considered 
material in relation to the Company’s financial statements. 

Basis of preparation 

These  financial  statements  have  been  prepared  in  accordance  with  applicable  United  Kingdom  Accounting 
standards, including Financial Reporting Standard 102 -The Financial Reporting Standard applicable in the UK and 
Republic of Ireland (“FRS 102”) and with the Companies Act 2006.  The financial statements have been prepared 
under the historical cost convention. 

The financial statements are prepared in sterling rounded to the nearest thousand pounds (£’000). 

The company has taken advantage of the exemption from disclosing the following information in its company 
only accounts, as permitted by the reduced disclosure regime within FRS 102: 

• 

Section 7 ‘Statement of Cash Flows’ – Presentation of a Statement of Cash Flow and related notes and 
disclosures 

Profit and loss account 

Under section 408(4) of the Companies Act 2006 the Company is exempt from the requirement to present its 
own profit and loss account.  The profit for the year ended 31 March 2021 and 31 March 2020 is disclosed in the 
Statement of Changes in Equity. 

Going concern 

The going concern basis of accounting has been used in the preparation of these financial statements. The Solid 
State PLC entity balance sheet reflects £32k net current liabilities excluding group liabilities due to the recognition 
of  the  £2.6m  of  deferred  consideration.  The  deferred  consideration  can  be  settled  through  the  Groups bank 
facilities which are committed until Nov 2022 with £3.75m undrawn at the balance sheet date. The Directors 
have not identified any material uncertainties in this regard. 

Foreign currencies 

Foreign currency transactions are translated at the rates ruling when they occurred.   Foreign currency monetary 
assets and liabilities are translated at the rate of exchange ruling at the statement of financial position date.  Any 
differences are taken to the statement of comprehensive income. 

Investments in subsidiaries 

Investments in subsidiaries are stated at cost less amounts provided for impairment. When the trade and assets 
of a subsidiary are consolidated / re-organised the investment is re-allocated based on the cost method where 
the commercial substance and economic reality is that the Investment carrying value remains intact. The carrying 
value of the revised investments are evaluated for impairment in accordance with FRS102. 

Other financial liabilities 

Other financial liabilities are accounted for on the same basis as in the consolidated accounts. See accounting 
policy on page 83 as there is no material difference between FRS102 and IFRS. 

Share based payment 

Share  based  payments  are  accounted  for  on  the  same  basis  as  in  the  consolidated  accounts.  See  accounting 
policy on page 86 as there is no material difference between FRS102 and IFRS. 

Treasury Shares 

Treasury shares are accounted for on the same basis as in the consolidated accounts. See accounting policy on 
page 83 as there is no material difference between FRS102 and IFRS. 

123 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE COMPANY FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2021  

2. 

STAFF COSTS 

Wages and salaries 
Social security costs 
Other pension costs 
Share based payment charges 

Total staff costs 

2021 
£’000 

697 
118 
40 
171 
_______ 

1,026 
_______ 

2020 
£’000 

1,299 
230 
42 
381 
_______ 

1,952 
_______ 

Staff costs amounted £1,026k (2020: £1,952k) and comprised the share based payment expense of £171k (2020: 
£381k) and provision for employer’s national insurance on exercise of share options of £24k (2020: £52k). 

Included within the Company Staff costs are the salary and related costs in respect of Mr A B Frere, Mr G S Marsh, 
Mr P O James, Mr N F Rogers (appointed 1 July 2019) and Mr P Haining. Mr J Lavery (retired 31 August 2019) was 
included in the 2020 comparative period. No other Directors remuneration was paid by the Company. Details of 
the  Directors  whose  emoluments  were  paid  by  other  Group  companies  are  given  in  the  Remuneration 
Committee Report on page 44 to 57. 

The average monthly number of employees during the year, including the Executive Directors, was as follows: 

Management and administration 

3. 

SHARE BASED PAYMENT 

See Group share based payments disclosures in note 28 to the Group accounts. 

2021 
Number 

12 
_______ 

12 
_______ 

2020 
Number 

15 
_______ 

15 
_______ 

124 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE COMPANY FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2021  

4. 

INVESTMENTS 

Subsidiary undertakings 

Cost 
1 April 
Additions 

31 March 

Net book value 
31 March 

2021 
£’000 

13,255 
20,748 
_______ 

34,003 
_______ 

2020 
£’000 

13,320 
(65) 
_______ 

13,255 
_______ 

34,003 
_______ 

13,255 
_______ 

The movement in the period relates to the acquisitions of Willow Technologies Group and the Active Silicon 
Group as described in Note 31 to the Group accounts.   

Subsidiary undertakings 

Net book value of investment in: 
Steatite limited 
Solid State Supplies Limited 
Pacer Technologies Limited 
Willow Technologies Group 
Active Silicon Group 

Total investments at 31 March 

Subsidiary undertakings 

See Group subsidiary undertakings disclosures in note 14 to the Group accounts. 

5. 

DEBTORS 

Amounts owed by Group undertakings 
Other debtors 
Prepayments 

2021 
£’000 

5,307 
4,201 
3,747 
13,144 
7,604 
_______ 

34,003 
_______ 

2021 
£’000 

3,200 
11 
12 
_______ 

3,223 
_______ 

2020 
£’000 

5,307 
4,201 
3,747 
- 
- 
_______ 

13,255 
_______ 

2020 
£’000 

4,351 
7 
12 
_______ 

4,370 
_______ 

125 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  NOTES TO THE COMPANY FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 March 2021 

6. 

CREDITORS – Amounts falling due within one year 

Amounts owed to Group undertakings 
Other taxes and social security costs 
Trade and other creditors 
Accruals 
Bank borrowings 
Deferred consideration on acquisitions 

2021 
£’000 

19,144 
107 
86 
602 
- 
2,572 
_______ 

22,511 
_______ 

2020 
£’000 

9,434 
227 
47 
862 
333 
- 
_______ 

10,903 
_______ 

The Company has guaranteed bank borrowings of all its subsidiary undertakings, the main trading subsidiaries 
are Solid State Supplies Limited, Steatite Limited, Pacer Components Limited, Willow Technologies Limited and 
Active Silicon Limited. At the year end the liabilities covered by those guarantees amounted to £nil (2020: £nil).  
The  Company  accounts  for  guarantees  provided  to  Group  companies  as  insurance  contracts,  recognising  a 
liability only to the extent that it is probable the guarantees will be called upon. 

The short-term deferred consideration on acquisitions is £1.6m for Willow Technologies Group and £1.0m for 
Active Silicon Group as disclosed in note 31 of the consolidated Group accounts. 

All amounts owed to / from Group undertakings are payable / repayable on demand and not interest bearing. 

7. 

CREDITORS – Amounts falling due after more than one year 

Bank borrowings 
Deferred consideration on acquisitions 

2021 
£’000 

3,750 
4,950 
_______ 

8,700 
_______ 

2020 
£’000 

- 
- 
_______ 

- 
_______ 

The long-term deferred consideration on acquisitions is £3.5m for Willow Technologies Group and £1.45m for 
Active  Silicon  Group  as  disclosed  in  note  31  of  the  consolidated  Group  accounts.  See  note  19  to  the  Group 
accounts for borrowings disclosures. 

8. 

SHARE CAPITAL 

See Group share capital disclosures in note 25 to the Group accounts. 

9. 

RESERVES 

See Group reserves disclosures in note 26 to the Group accounts. 

10.  OWN SHARES HELD IN TREASURY 

See Group treasury shares disclosures in note 27 to the Group accounts. 

126 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTICE OF ANNUAL GENERAL MEETING 

The annual general meeting is being held at the registered office of the company in the usual way and in accordance 
with the current Articles of Association. However, to comply with Government public health guidance and rules, the 
venue is subject to social distancing rules which limit the number of people who can be accommodated in the room.  

We would request that shareholders do not attend the meeting in person but instead appoint the Chairman of the 
meeting as a proxy by completing the proxy card and indicating how they wish to vote on the card.  

However, if any shareholders are intending to attend the meeting in person, we would request that they register this 
intention at least 48 hours in advance of the meeting at (investor.information@solidstateplc.com). This will ensure that 
adequate precautions can be taken to ensure that the social distancing guidelines are followed. 

Notice is hereby given that the annual general meeting of Solid State PLC will be held at 2, Ravensbank Business Park, 
Hedera Road Redditch B98 9EY, on 8 September 2021 at 9.30am for the following purposes: 

(1) 

(2) 

(3) 

(4) 

(5) 

(6) 

(7) 

(8) 

ORDINARY RESOLUTIONS 

To receive the accounts for the year ended 31 March 2021, together with the reports of the Directors and 
auditors thereon.  (Resolution 1) 

To approve the Directors’ Annual Report on Remuneration (this is an advisory vote). (Resolution 2) 

To declare a final dividend of 10.75p per share.  (Resolution 3) 

To reappoint Mr Matthew T Richards, who retires by rotation, as a Director of the Company in accordance with 
the Company’s Articles of Association.  (Resolution 4) 

To reappoint Mr Peter J Magowan, being a Director of the Company appointed since the last annual general 
meeting, in accordance with the Company’s Articles of Association.  (Resolution 5) 

To reappoint RSM UK Audit LLP as auditors of the Company.  (Resolution 6) 

To authorise the Directors to fix the auditors’ remuneration.  (Resolution 7) 

To pass the following resolution: 

That  the  Directors  be  generally  and  unconditionally  authorised  to  allot  shares  in  the  Company  (Relevant 
Securities): 

i) 

comprising equity securities (as defined by section 560 of the Companies Act 2006) up to an aggregate 
nominal amount of £141,320.49 (which is 33% of the issued share capital) (such amount to be reduced 
by the nominal amount of any Relevant Securities allotted under paragraph (ii) below) in connection with 
an offer by way of a rights issue: 

(a)  to  holders  of  ordinary  shares  in  proportion  (as  nearly  as  may  be  practicable)  to  their  respective 
holdings; and 

(b) to holders of other equity securities as required by the rights of those securities or as the Directors 
otherwise consider necessary, 

but subject to such exclusions or other arrangements as the Board may deem necessary or expedient in 
relation to treasury shares, fractional entitlements, record dates, legal or practical problems in or under 
the laws of any territory or the requirements of any regulatory body or stock exchange; and 

in any other case, up to an aggregate nominal amount of £85,648.78 (which is 20% of the issued 
ii) 
share capital) (such amount to be reduced by the nominal amount of any equity securities allotted under 
paragraph i) above, provided that this authority shall, unless renewed, varied or revoked by the Company, 
expire after a period of 18 months from the passing of this resolution or, if earlier, the date of the next 
annual general meeting of the Company save that the Company may, before such expiry, make offers or 
agreements which would or might require Relevant Securities to be allotted and the Directors may allot 
Relevant Securities in pursuance of such offer or agreement notwithstanding that the authority conferred 
by this resolution has expired. 

127 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
NOTICE OF ANNUAL GENERAL MEETING (continued) 

This resolution revokes and replaces all unexercised authorities previously granted to the Directors to allot 
Relevant Securities but without prejudice to any allotment of shares or grant of rights already made, offered 
or agreed to be made pursuant to such authorities.  (Resolution 8) 

SPECIAL RESOLUTIONS 

(9) 

To pass the following resolution: 

That the Company is authorised to allot equity securities pursuant to resolution 8 above up to an aggregate 
nominal amount of £42,824.39, which is 10% of the issued share capital, as if Section 561 of the Companies Act 
2006 (existing shareholders – right of pre-emption): 

i) 

ii) 

did not apply to the allotment; or 

applied to the allotment with such modifications as the Directors may determine provided that this 
authority shall, unless renewed, varied or revoked by the company, expire after a period of 18 months 
from the passing of this resolution save that the company may, before such expiry, make offers or 
agreements which would or might require equity securities to be allotted and the Directors may allot 
equity  securities  in  pursuance  of  such  offer  or  agreement  not  withstanding  that  the  authority 
conferred by the resolution has expired.  (Resolution 9) 

(10) 

To pass the following resolution: 

That the Company is, pursuant to Section 701 of the Companies Act 2006, hereby generally and unconditionally 
authorised  to  make  market  purchases  (within  the  meaning  of  Section  693  of  the  Companies  Act  2006)  of 
ordinary shares of 5p each in the capital of the Company (“ordinary shares”) provided that:- 

i) 

ii) 

iii) 

iv) 

v) 

vi) 

the minimum price which may be paid for the ordinary shares is 5p per ordinary share; 

the  maximum  price  that  may  be  paid  for  such  shares  is,  in  respect  of  a  share  contracted  to  be 
purchased on any day, an amount (exclusive of all expenses) equal to 105 per cent of the average 
middle market quotations of the ordinary shares of the company as derived from the Daily Official List 
of the London Stock Exchange on the 10 dealing days immediately preceding the day on which the 
shares are contracted to be purchased; 

the  authority  hereby  conferred  shall  expire  after  a  period  of  18  months  from  the  passing  of  this 
resolution unless such authority is renewed prior to such expiry; 
the authority hereby conferred is in substitution for any existing authority to purchase ordinary shares 
under the said Section 701; 
the Company may make a contract to purchase ordinary shares under the authority hereby conferred 
prior to the expiry of such authority which will be executed wholly or partly after the expiry of such 
authority and may make a purchase or purchases of ordinary shares in pursuance of any such contract; 
and 
the maximum number of ordinary shares hereby authorised to be purchased by the Company does 
not exceed 15 per cent of the issued ordinary share capital of the Company at the date of the passing 
of this resolution.  (Resolution 10) 

BY ORDER OF THE BOARD 

P Haining FCA 
Secretary 
13 July 2021 
Registered office: 2 Ravensbank Business Park, Hedera Road, Redditch, B98 9EY 

128 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTICE OF ANNUAL GENERAL MEETING (continued) 

NOTES: 

Entitlement to attend and vote 

1.  Only those members registered on the Company’s register of members at close of business 2 days before the 

time appointed for the meeting, or if this meeting is adjourned, at close of business on the day two days prior to 
the adjourned meeting shall be entitled to attend and vote at this meeting. 

Attending in person 

2. 

If you wish to attend the meeting in person, please bring photographic identification with you to the meeting. 

Appointment of proxies 

3. 

4. 

If you are a member of the company at the time set out in note 1 above, you are entitled to appoint a proxy to 
exercise all or any of your rights to attend, speak and vote at the meeting and you should have received a proxy 
form with this notice of meeting.  You can only appoint a proxy using the procedures set out in these notes and 
the notes to the proxy form. 

If you are not a member of the company but you have been nominated by a member of the company to enjoy 
information rights, you do not have a right to appoint any proxies under the procedures set out in this 
“Appointment of proxies” section. 

5.  A proxy does not need to be a member of the company but must attend the Meeting to represent you.  Details 

of how to appoint the Chairman of the Meeting or another person as your proxy using the proxy form are set out 
in the notes to the proxy form. 

6.  You may appoint more than one proxy provided each proxy is appointed to exercise rights attached to different 

shares.  You may not appoint more than one proxy to exercise rights attached to any one share. 

7.  A vote withheld is not a vote in law, which means that the vote will not be counted in the circulation of votes for 
or against the resolution.  If no voting indication is given, your proxy will vote or abstain from voting at his or her 
discretion. Your proxy will vote (or abstain from voting) as he or she thinks fit in relation to any other matter 
which is put before the Meeting. 

Appointment of proxy using hard copy proxy form 

8.  The notes to the proxy form explain how to direct your proxy how to vote on each resolution or withhold their 

vote.  To appoint a proxy using the proxy form, the form must be completed and signed and sent or delivered to 
Neville Registrars Limited, Neville House, Steelpark Road, Halesowen, B62 8HD, not later than 48 hours before the 
time appointed for the Meeting. The completion and return of a form of proxy will not, however, preclude 
shareholders from attending and voting in person at the Meeting. 

In the case of a member which is a company, the proxy form must be executed under its common seal or signed 
on its behalf by an officer of the company or an attorney for the company. 

Any power of attorney or any other authority under which the proxy form is signed (or a duly certified copy of 
such power of authority) must be included with the proxy form. 

Appointment of proxy joint members 

9. 

In the case of joint holders, where more than one of the joint holders purports to appoint a proxy, only the 
appointment submitted by the most senior holder will be accepted,  Seniority is determined by the order in which 
the names of the joint holders appear in the Company’s register of members in respect of the joint holding (the 
first-named being the most senior). 

129 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTICE OF ANNUAL GENERAL MEETING (continued) 

NOTES: 

Changing proxy instructions 

10.  To change your proxy instructions simply submit a new proxy appointment using the methods set out above.  
Note that the cut-off time for receipt of proxy appointments (see above) also apply in relation to amended 
instructions; and amended proxy appointment received after the relevant cut-off time will be disregarded. 

Where you have appointed a proxy using the hard-copy proxy form and would like to change the instructions 
using another hard-copy proxy form, please contact Neville Registrars Limited, Neville House, Steelpark Road, 
Halesowen, B62 8HD. 

If you submit more than one valid proxy appointment, the appointment received last before the latest time for 
the receipt of proxies will take precedence. 

Termination of proxy appointments 

11.  In order to revoke a proxy instruction, you will need to inform the Company using one of the following methods: 

a.  By sending a signed hard copy notice clearly stating your intention to revoke your proxy appoint to Neville 

Registrars Limited, Neville House, Steelpark Road, Halesowen, B62 8HD. 

b. 

In the case of a member which is a company, the revocation notice must be executed under its common seal 
or signed on its behalf by an officer of the Company or an attorney for the company.  Any power of attorney 
or any other authority under which the revocation notice is signed (or a duly certified copy of such power of 
authority) must be included with the revocation notice. 

In either case, the revocation notice must be received by the Neville Registrars Limited, Neville House, Steelpark 
Road, Halesowen, B62 8HD, not later than 48 hours before the time appointed for the Meeting. 

Appointment of a proxy does not preclude you from attending the Meeting and voting in person.  If you have 
appointed a proxy and attend the Meeting in person, your proxy appointment will automatically be terminated. 

Issued shares and total voting rights 

12.  As at 13 July 2021 the Company’s issued share capital comprised of 8,564,878 ordinary shares of 5p each which 

includes 11,374 shares held in treasury.  Each ordinary share carries the right to one vote at a general meeting of 
the Company and, therefore, the total number of voting rights in the Company as at 13 July 2021 8,553,504. 

Documents on display 

13.  The following documents will be available for inspection at the place of the Annual General Meeting prior to the 

meeting until the time of the Meeting and for at least 15 minutes prior to the meeting: 

a.  The register of Directors’ interests in the share capital and debentures of the Company; and  

b.  Copies of service agreements under which Directors of the Company are employed 

c.  The full rules of the LTIP 

d.  The full rules of the CSOP  

e.  Copies of the new Articles of Association of Solid State PLC Company No 00771335. 

130 

                                                                                                                            
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
131